WO2022152238A1 - Communication method and communication apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and communication apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022152238A1
WO2022152238A1 PCT/CN2022/071996 CN2022071996W WO2022152238A1 WO 2022152238 A1 WO2022152238 A1 WO 2022152238A1 CN 2022071996 W CN2022071996 W CN 2022071996W WO 2022152238 A1 WO2022152238 A1 WO 2022152238A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
virtual network
group
network group
target
service
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/071996
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
谢春生
韩文勇
丁辉
刁文波
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022152238A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022152238A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/18Selecting a network or a communication service
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L12/00Data switching networks
    • H04L12/28Data switching networks characterised by path configuration, e.g. LAN [Local Area Networks] or WAN [Wide Area Networks]
    • H04L12/46Interconnection of networks
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L12/00Data switching networks
    • H04L12/28Data switching networks characterised by path configuration, e.g. LAN [Local Area Networks] or WAN [Wide Area Networks]
    • H04L12/46Interconnection of networks
    • H04L12/4641Virtual LANs, VLANs, e.g. virtual private networks [VPN]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/11Allocation or use of connection identifiers

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and a communication device.
  • 5th generation mobile networks 5G) local area network (LAN) can be used in a wide range of mobile network coverage. Regardless of whether users are in the same region, as long as they join the same 5G local area network, data exchange and communication based on the local area network can be realized.
  • 5G 5th generation mobile networks
  • LAN local area network
  • the 5G local area network service is defined in the 3GPP protocol, which can build a virtual mobile private network for users in a network system such as a mobile network to realize virtual private network communication.
  • VN Virtual Network
  • the 5G local area network corresponding to the virtual network group can provide communication services for the terminal devices in the virtual network group.
  • the communication between two terminal devices that have signed up to the same virtual network group has the characteristics of local area network communication.
  • 5G local area networks corresponding to different virtual network groups can be connected to different data networks, and terminal devices between different virtual network groups are isolated from each other.
  • the data network (DN) corresponding to the virtual network group completes data exchange, and can directly complete data exchange with other terminal devices in the virtual network group through the user plane function (UPF) network element.
  • UPF user plane function
  • the terminal device needs to determine the virtual network group to be accessed when initiating a service according to the identification information of the data network, and then use the session service in the virtual network group for data transmission.
  • the virtual network group that the terminal device can access is also uniquely determined, and the terminal device can only transmit data through the session service in the virtual network group, which greatly limits the terminal device. Flexibility to choose session services and use session services for data communication.
  • the present application provides a communication method and a communication device, which are used to improve the flexibility of a terminal device in selecting a session service and using the session service for data communication.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is applied to a terminal device.
  • the method includes: when initiating a target service, selecting a target virtual network in at least one virtual network group according to service information of the target service group; wherein, the at least one virtual network group is configured by the network side for the target service, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, any virtual network group
  • the terminal equipment managed by the network group can form a virtual local area network; the target session of the target service in the target virtual network group is determined, and data transmission is performed through the target session.
  • a terminal device when initiating a service, can flexibly select a target virtual network group to access in at least one virtual network group configured for the terminal service on the network side according to service information, and use the virtual network group in the target virtual network group
  • the session performs data communication, which improves the flexibility of the terminal device to access the virtual network group, thereby improving the flexibility and efficiency of the terminal device selecting and using the session service for data communication.
  • the selecting a target virtual network group from at least one virtual network group according to the service information of the target service includes: in at least one user routing policy, selecting a target virtual network group that matches the service information The target user routing policy, wherein the target user routing policy includes the service information and the group identifier of at least one available virtual network group corresponding to the service information; in the at least one virtual network group, select the target virtual network group contained in the at least one available virtual network group.
  • the user routing policy matched by the terminal device according to the service information for initiating the service includes the group identifier of at least one available virtual network group corresponding to the service information, and the terminal device can determine which ones are based on the group identifier information.
  • a virtual network group can provide services for itself, and can flexibly select a virtual network group to access from among the virtual network groups available for services.
  • the determining the target session of the target service in the target virtual network group includes: in the established session, selecting the target that matches the routing policy of the target user or send a session creation request to the session management function network element, where the session creation request is used to request creation of the target session, wherein the session creation request carries the group identifier of the target virtual network group.
  • the virtual network group to be accessed can be specified by carrying the group identifier of the target virtual network group in the session creation request sent to the session management function network element.
  • the network element of the session management function can quickly determine the virtual network group that the terminal device selects to access, and then establish a session in the virtual network group for the terminal device.
  • the method before selecting a target virtual network group in at least one virtual network group, the method further includes: in the process of registering the terminal device into the network, receiving an access and mobility management function network element or, in the process of updating the configuration of the terminal device, receiving the list of serviceable virtual network groups issued by the access and mobility management function network element;
  • the virtual netgroup list contains the target virtual netgroup.
  • the terminal device can directly determine the virtual network group that can provide services for itself according to the serviceable virtual network group list issued by the access and mobility management function network element, that is, the virtual network group that the terminal device can access , the terminal device can flexibly select a virtual network group to be finally accessed from among the virtual network groups that it can access when initiating a service.
  • the method before selecting the target virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group, the method further includes: receiving the at least one user routing policy issued by the policy control function network element.
  • the terminal device obtains the user routing policy before selecting the target virtual network group, which ensures that the terminal device has the available user routing policy, and then selects the target virtual network group by matching the user routing policy.
  • the data transmission through the target session includes: through the target session, communicating with the target data network, other terminal devices in the target virtual network group, or other terminal devices in other virtual network groups
  • the terminal device performs data transmission
  • the other virtual network groups are virtual network groups other than the target virtual network group.
  • the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; a group identifier assigned by the authentication-authorization-accounting AAA server.
  • the terminal device can use various types of group identifiers to identify and mark the virtual network group, and has high flexibility.
  • the configuration information further includes at least one of the following: data network name; single network slice selection auxiliary information; session type; application descriptor; secondary authentication/authorization information; ; address information; wherein, the data network name is used to indicate the data network that the virtual network group supports access to; the single network slice selection auxiliary information is used to indicate the network slice adopted by the virtual network group; the session The type is used to indicate the type of the session in the virtual network group; the application descriptor is used to indicate the information of the application to which the target service belongs; the secondary authentication/authorization information is used to perform secondary authentication/authorization;
  • the default group indication information is used to indicate whether the virtual network group is a set default virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the geographic area range that the virtual network group can serve; the address information is used to indicate the virtual network The group contains at least one address to be assigned to the end device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is applied to a network element with a session management function.
  • the method includes: determining a target virtual network group according to a session creation request from a terminal device, where the session creation request is: A request sent by the terminal device when initiating a target service, the target virtual network group is included in at least one virtual network group configured on the network side for the target service, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group For managing the terminal devices accessing the virtual network group, any terminal device managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network; establish a target session in the target virtual network group, and the target session is used for the terminal device data transfer.
  • the network side is configured with at least one virtual network group for the terminal service, which can support the terminal device to flexibly select the target virtual network group to access according to the service information for initiating the service, and the session management function network element on the network side is the
  • the terminal device establishes the target session in the target virtual network group, which can realize the data transmission of the terminal device; meanwhile, it can adapt to the networking scenario in which one data network corresponds to multiple virtual network groups.
  • the method before determining the target virtual network group, further includes: receiving virtual network group configuration information from the unified data management function network element; the virtual network group configuration information includes at least one virtual network group Corresponding configuration information, the at least one virtual network group includes the target virtual network group, and the configuration information includes at least one of the following: default group indication information; serviceable area information; address information; wherein, the default group The indication information is used to indicate whether the virtual network group is a set default virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the range of geographical areas that the virtual network group can serve; the address information is used to indicate that the virtual network group contains at least An address to be assigned to the end device.
  • the session management function network element can determine the relevant information of the target virtual network group according to the configuration information. For example, the session management function network element can determine the relevant information of the target virtual network group according to the configuration information.
  • the instruction information determines a default virtual network group in at least one virtual network group, and then when the terminal device does not specify a virtual network group to access, the default virtual network group is used as a target virtual network group to provide services for the terminal device; session management function
  • the network element can determine whether the virtual network group can provide services for terminal equipment in a certain location area according to the serviceable area information in the configuration information; the network element with the session management function can also provide access to the terminal equipment according to the address information in the configuration information. assign address.
  • the session creation request carries a group identifier of a virtual network group
  • the determining a target virtual network group includes: determining a virtual network group corresponding to the group identifier as the target virtual network group.
  • the session creation request received by the session management function network element from the terminal device carries the group identifier of the target virtual network group, so the session management function network element does not need to
  • the virtual network group to be accessed by the terminal device can be quickly and directly determined, and then a session in the virtual network group can be established for the terminal device, and the target virtual network to be accessed by the terminal device can be specified. Group.
  • the determining the target virtual network group according to the session creation request from the terminal device includes: if the session creation request does not carry the group identifier of the virtual network group, configuring the target virtual network group according to the virtual network group information, and determine the set default virtual network group as the target virtual network group.
  • the session management function network element selects the default virtual network group to provide session services for the terminal device, which can In the scenario of virtual network groups available to multiple terminal devices, the virtual network group that provides session services for terminal devices can also be quickly determined; at the same time, it can adapt to the networking scenario where one data network corresponds to multiple virtual network groups.
  • the method further includes: assigning an address to the terminal device according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group; or, sending the group identifier of the target virtual network group to the AAA server, so that the AAA server determines the target virtual network group according to the group identifier, and assigns an address to the terminal device according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group; wherein the configuration information Contains the address information.
  • the network side can support that each virtual network group contains its own address segment, so as to avoid the conflict of address information of multiple virtual network groups, and the session management function network element can, according to the address segment corresponding to the virtual network group, provide the The terminal equipment that enters the virtual network group allocates addresses, so it can adapt to address allocation in a networking scenario in which one data network corresponds to multiple virtual network groups.
  • the method further includes: delivering a data packet forwarding policy to the user plane functional network element, so that the user plane functional network element, according to the data packet forwarding policy, forwards the received The service data message is forwarded; wherein, the data message forwarding policy includes: judging whether there is a packet inspection rule matching the service data message in at least one packet inspection rule, and if so, according to the packet inspection rule Forward the service data message, otherwise, determine whether the destination address and the source address contained in the service data message belong to the same virtual network group; if it is determined that the destination address and the source address belong to the same virtual network group, do not forward all The service data message, if it is determined that the destination address and the source address do not belong to the same virtual network group, the service data message is forwarded according to the set packet inspection rule; wherein, the packet inspection rule is used to indicate that the service data The forwarding method used for the packet.
  • the session management function network element issues a data packet forwarding policy to the user plane function network element, so that the user plane function network element processes the received data packet based on the policy, wherein, according to the policy
  • the packet inspection rule matching the received service data packet is not matched, if it is determined that the destination address and source address contained in the service data packet belong to the same virtual network group, it is considered that an abnormality has occurred, and the user plane function network element does not work. Forwarding the service data message can prevent the loop problem between the UPF and the data network due to the repeated forwarding of messages.
  • the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
  • the network element of the session management function can use various types of group identifiers to identify and mark the virtual network group, and has high flexibility.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is applied to a policy control function network element.
  • the method includes: receiving a virtual network group issued by an application function network element, a capability opening function network element, or a unified data warehouse network element.
  • configuration information wherein the virtual network group configuration information includes configuration information corresponding to at least one virtual network group, the at least one virtual network group is the target service configuration initiated by the network side for the terminal device, and the at least one virtual network group
  • Each virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, and the terminal equipment managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network;
  • at least one user routing policy is generated , and deliver the at least one user routing policy to the terminal device.
  • the network side is configured with at least one virtual network group for the terminal service, which can support the terminal device to flexibly select the target virtual network group to access according to the service information of the initiating service.
  • the virtual network group configuration information of the at least one virtual network group generates a user routing policy for the terminal device, so that the terminal device can determine the target virtual network group to be accessed in the at least one virtual network group by matching the user routing policy ; At the same time, it can adapt to the networking scenario where one data network corresponds to multiple virtual network groups.
  • the user routing policy includes service information and a group identifier of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information, and the service information is service information of the target service.
  • the user routing policy issued by the policy control function network element to the terminal device includes service information and a group identifier of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information, and the terminal device can match the service information according to the service information.
  • the user selects the target virtual network group according to the group identifier included in the routing policy, and can specify access to the target virtual network group to the network side according to the group identifier of the selected target virtual network group.
  • the configuration information includes at least the service information and serviceable area information of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information; the user routing policy also includes information related to the service information The serviceable area information of the corresponding at least one virtual network group; wherein the serviceable area information is used to indicate the range of the geographical area that the virtual network group can serve.
  • the configuration information of the virtual network group obtained by the network element of the policy control function includes the serviceable area information corresponding to the virtual network group, and the user routing policy delivered to the terminal device carries the serviceable area information corresponding to the virtual network group.
  • the area information enables the terminal device to determine the virtual network group that can provide services for itself based on its own location and the serviceable area information of the virtual network group, and then further select the virtual network group to be accessed.
  • the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
  • the network element of the policy control function can use various types of group identifiers to identify and mark the virtual network group, and has high flexibility.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a processing unit; the processing unit is configured to select a target virtual network in at least one virtual network group according to service information of the target service when initiating a target service group; wherein, the at least one virtual network group is configured by the network side for the target service, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, any virtual network group
  • the terminal equipment managed by the network group can form a virtual local area network; the processing unit is further configured to determine the target session of the target service in the target virtual network group, and perform data transmission through the target session.
  • the processing unit when the processing unit selects the target virtual network group in at least one virtual network group according to the service information of the target service, the processing unit is specifically configured to: in at least one user routing selection policy, select the The target user routing policy matched by the service information, wherein the target user routing policy includes the service information and the group identifier of at least one available virtual network group corresponding to the service information; In a network group, the target virtual network group included in the at least one available virtual network group is selected.
  • the processing unit when the processing unit determines the target session of the target service in the target virtual network group, the processing unit is specifically configured to: in the established session, select a routing strategy with the target user the matching target session; or, sending a session creation request to a session management function network element, where the session creation request is used to request creation of the target session, wherein the session creation request carries the group of the target virtual network group logo.
  • the communication apparatus further includes a transceiver unit, and before the processing unit selects a target virtual network group in at least one virtual network group, the transceiver unit is further configured to: register the terminal device to access the network In the process of receiving the serviceable virtual network group list issued by the access and mobility management function network element; or, in the process of updating the configuration of the terminal equipment, receiving the access and mobility management function network element.
  • the transceiver unit before the processing unit selects the target virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group, the transceiver unit is further configured to: receive the at least one user routing selection delivered by the policy control function network element Strategy.
  • the processing unit performs data transmission through the target session, including: communicating with the target data network, other terminal devices in the target virtual network group, or other virtual network groups through the target session
  • the terminal equipment in the device performs data transmission
  • the other virtual network groups are virtual network groups other than the target virtual network group.
  • the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
  • the configuration information further includes at least one of the following: data network name; single network slice selection auxiliary information; session type; application descriptor; secondary authentication/authorization information; ; address information; wherein, the data network name is used to indicate the data network that the virtual network group supports access to; the single network slice selection auxiliary information is used to indicate the network slice adopted by the virtual network group; the session The type is used to indicate the type of the session in the virtual network group; the application descriptor is used to indicate the information of the application to which the target service belongs; the secondary authentication/authorization information is used to perform secondary authentication/authorization;
  • the default group indication information is used to indicate whether the virtual network group is a set default virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the geographic area range that the virtual network group can serve; the address information is used to indicate the virtual network The group contains at least one address to be assigned to the end device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, including a processing unit; the processing unit is configured to determine a target virtual network group according to a session creation request from a terminal device, wherein the session creation request is for the terminal A request sent by a device when initiating a target service, the target virtual network group is included in at least one virtual network group configured on the network side for the target service, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage For the terminal devices accessing the virtual network group, any terminal device managed by the virtual network group can form a virtual local area network; the processing unit is further configured to establish a target session in the target virtual network group, and the target session is used for The terminal equipment performs data transmission.
  • the communication device further includes a transceiver unit, and before the processing unit determines the target virtual network group, the transceiver unit is further configured to: receive the virtual network group configuration from the unified data management function network element information; the virtual network group configuration information includes configuration information corresponding to at least one virtual network group, the at least one virtual network group includes the target virtual network group, and the configuration information includes at least one of the following: default group indication information ; serviceable area information; address information; wherein, the default group indication information is used to indicate whether the virtual network group is a set default virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the geographical area that the virtual network group can serve range; the address information is used to indicate at least one address to be allocated to the terminal device contained in the virtual network group.
  • the session creation request carries the group identifier of the virtual network group, and when determining the target virtual network group, the processing unit is specifically configured to: determine that the virtual network group corresponding to the group identifier is the The target virtual network group.
  • the processing unit when determining the target virtual network group according to the session creation request from the terminal device, is specifically configured to: if the session creation request does not carry the group identifier of the virtual network group, according to the The configuration information of the virtual network group is determined, and the set default virtual network group is determined as the target virtual network group.
  • the processing unit cooperates with the transceiver unit, and is further configured to: assign an address to the terminal device according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group;
  • the group identifier of the virtual network group is sent to the AAA server, so that the AAA server determines the target virtual network group according to the group identifier, and configures the terminal device according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group. Allocating an address; wherein, the configuration information includes the address information.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to: deliver a data packet forwarding policy to the user plane functional network element, so that the user plane functional network element can forward the receiving The received service data message is forwarded; wherein, the data message forwarding strategy includes: judging whether there is a packet inspection rule matching the service data message in at least one packet inspection rule, and if so, according to the packet inspection rule.
  • the detection rule forwards the service data message, otherwise, it is judged whether the destination address and the source address contained in the service data message belong to the same virtual network group; if it is determined that the destination address and the source address belong to the same virtual network group, no Forward the service data message, if it is determined that the destination address and the source address do not belong to the same virtual network group, forward the service data message according to the set packet inspection rule; Forwarding mode used for service data packets.
  • the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a transceiver unit and a processing unit;
  • the transceiver unit is configured to receive the virtual network group configuration information issued by the application function network element, the capability opening function network element or the unified data warehouse network element, wherein the virtual network group configuration information includes at least one virtual network group corresponding.
  • Configuration information the at least one virtual network group is the target service configuration initiated by the network side for the terminal device, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, any one The terminal equipment managed by the virtual network group can form a virtual local area network;
  • the processing unit cooperates with the transceiver unit to generate at least one user routing policy according to the virtual network group configuration information, and send the at least one user The routing policy is delivered to the terminal device.
  • the user routing policy includes service information and a group identifier of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information, and the service information is service information of the target service.
  • the configuration information at least includes the service information and serviceable area information of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information; the user routing policy also includes the service information The serviceable area information of the corresponding at least one virtual network group; wherein the serviceable area information is used to indicate the range of the geographical area that the virtual network group can serve.
  • the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: at least one processor; and a memory and a communication interface communicatively connected to the at least one processor; wherein the communication interface is configured to receive data from the communication communication means other than the device and transmit to the processor or send signals from the processor to other communication means other than the communication device; the memory stores data that can be processed by the at least one
  • the at least one processor executes the instructions stored in the memory to cause the communication apparatus to perform any one of the above aspects or any one of the methods of any one of the aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, where the communication system includes a terminal device, a network element with a session management function, and a network element with a policy control function; wherein the terminal device is configured to execute the first aspect or the first any one of the methods in the aspect; the session management function network element is used to execute any one of the above second aspect or the second aspect method; the policy control function network element is used to execute the above third aspect or the third aspect any method in the aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where computer programs or instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer programs or instructions are run on a communication device, the communication device is made to execute each of the above any possible design method of the aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program or instructions, when a communication device reads and executes the computer program product, the communication device is made to perform any one of the above aspects. method in the design.
  • the present application provides a chip, the chip includes a processor, and the processor is coupled to a memory for reading and executing a software program stored in the memory, so as to implement any one of the above aspects method in a possible design.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a 5G networking architecture
  • Fig. 2 is a kind of schematic diagram of processing the data packet corresponding to the data message by a kind of UPF;
  • Fig. 3 is a kind of schematic diagram that UPF performs forwarding processing on data message
  • Figure 4a is a schematic diagram of the user plane architecture of a 5G VN group where the data of the terminal equipment is locally exchanged in the PSA UPF;
  • Figure 4b is a schematic diagram of the user plane architecture of the data cross-PSA UPF exchange scenario of the terminal equipment in the 5G VN group;
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system to which the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is applicable;
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a method for AF configuration management of a 5G VN group provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a network side delivering a serviceable VN group list in a terminal device registration and network access process according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a network side delivering a serviceable VN group list in a terminal configuration update process provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a PDU session creation process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of UPF forwarding data packets in a 5G LAN scenario
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a message forwarding strategy of a UPF provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the method and the device are based on the same technical concept. Since the principles of the method and the device for solving problems are similar, the implementation of the device and the method can be referred to each other, and repeated descriptions will not be repeated.
  • Terminal equipment The terminal equipment involved in the embodiments of this application may also be referred to as user equipment (user equipment, UE), mobile station (mobile station, MS), mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT), etc.
  • Terminal devices include devices that provide voice and/or data connectivity to users.
  • the terminal device may be a handheld device with wireless connectivity, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem.
  • the terminal equipment may communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), and exchange voice and/or data with the RAN.
  • the terminal equipment may include user equipment, vehicle to X (V2X) terminal equipment, wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device (D2D) terminal equipment, machine-to-machine/ Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, Internet of things (IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit (subscriber unit), subscriber station (subscriber station), mobile station (mobile station), remote station (remote station), access point (access point, AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user agent (user agent) , or user device, wearable device, in-vehicle device, etc.
  • V2X vehicle to X
  • D2D device-to-device
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc. It is a general term for the application of wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. Wait.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable device is not only a hardware device, but also realizes powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-scale, complete or partial functions without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, which needs to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones.
  • Use such as all kinds of smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring.
  • the various terminal devices described above if they are located on the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), can be considered as on-board terminal equipment.
  • the on-board terminal equipment is also called on-board unit (OBU). ).
  • the communication system is divided into an access network (AN) and a core network (core network, CN).
  • the access network is used to converge terminal equipment into the core network through 3GPP access technology.
  • the core network is used to connect terminal devices to different data networks.
  • the core network can be further divided into a control plane (signaling plane) and a user plane (data plane).
  • the communication system to which the communication method provided in this application is applicable includes a fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) communication system (ie, a new radio (NR) communication system), a future new generation communication system, and the like.
  • 5G fifth generation
  • NR new radio
  • the access network may also be referred to as a 5G radio access network (NG-radio access network (RAN), or NG-RAN), and the core network may also be referred to as a 5G core network (5G Core, 5GC).
  • NG-radio access network RAN
  • NG-RAN 5G radio access network
  • 5G Core 5G Core
  • the network side equipment is a network element located in the communication system.
  • the network-side device may be an access network device in a wireless access network, or a core network device in a core network. This application does not limit this.
  • Access network (access network, AN) equipment an entity on the network side for transmitting and/or receiving signals.
  • the access network device includes a device that accesses the communication system in a wired manner or wirelessly.
  • a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) device that wirelessly accesses a communication system may also be called a base station, or a RAN node, or a RAN device in the NG-RAN.
  • the RAN equipment may also coordinate attribute management of the air interface.
  • the RAN device may be a new radio controller (NR controller), a gNode B (gNB) in a 5G system, a centralized unit (centralized unit), a new radio base station, or a
  • the remote radio module can be a micro base station (also called a small cell), a relay, a distributed unit, a macro base station in various forms, or a transmission and reception point.
  • transmission reception point, TRP transmission reception point
  • TMF transmission measurement function
  • transmission point transmission point
  • TP transmission point
  • any other wireless access device or a base station in next-generation communications, but the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
  • core network equipment it is a network element located in the core network, which is used to realize the functions of the core network, for example, it is responsible for connecting the terminal equipment to different data according to the call request or service request sent by the terminal equipment through the access network. On the network, and responsible for billing, mobility management, session management and other services.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a 5G networking architecture.
  • the 5G networking architecture can refer to the networking architecture defined in the 3GPP 23.501 protocol.
  • the main functions of the functional network elements related to the architecture are introduced as follows:
  • Application function (AF) network element also known as application controller (application controller), which is mainly used to convey the requirements of the application side to the network side, such as quality of service (QoS) requirements, user status event subscription Wait.
  • the AF network element may be an application function entity of a third-party application, or may be an application service deployed by an operator, such as an IMS voice call service.
  • the application function entity of the third-party application can perform authorization processing through the network exposure function (NEF) network element when interacting with the core network.
  • NEF network exposure function
  • the application function entity of the third-party application directly sends a request message to the NEF network element.
  • the NEF network element verifies whether the AF network element is allowed to send the request message. If the verification passes, it forwards the request message to the corresponding policy control function (PCF) network element or unified data management function (UDM) ) network element.
  • PCF policy control function
  • UDM unified data management function
  • PCF network element It is mainly used to implement policy control functions such as charging for sessions and service flow levels, QoS bandwidth guarantee and mobility management, and user equipment policy decision-making.
  • UDM network element It is mainly used to implement data management functions such as managing subscription data and user access authorization.
  • Access and mobility management function (AMF) network element It is mainly used to implement functions such as mobility management and access authentication/authorization for terminal equipment.
  • AMF network element is also responsible for transferring user policies between the terminal device and the PCF network element.
  • Session management function (SMF) network element It is mainly used for packet data unit (PDU) session management for terminal equipment, execution of control policies issued by PCF, and user plane function (UPF). ) selection of network elements, assignment of IP addresses of terminal equipment when the PDU type is IP type, etc.
  • PDU packet data unit
  • UPF user plane function
  • UPF network element It is mainly used as the interface between terminal equipment and data network, and completes functions such as user plane data forwarding, session/flow-level accounting statistics, and bandwidth limitation.
  • Unified data repository (UDR) network element It is mainly responsible for the access function of data such as subscription data, policy data, and application data. Elements perform interface interconnection to realize access or invocation of corresponding network elements.
  • UDR Unified data repository
  • Authentication server function authentication server function, AUSF network element (not shown in Figure 1): can be used to support the access service authentication defined by the 3GPP framework, and can also support the authentication of non-3GPP access networks.
  • the core network may also include other network elements other than the network elements described in the above examples, which will not be listed one by one here.
  • this application does not limit the name of the corresponding network element that implements each function, and it can also implement other functions or be integrated with other functional network elements, and can also be called other names.
  • N1 interface It is the signaling plane interface between the AMF network element and the terminal device. It has nothing to do with the access network. It is used to exchange signaling messages between the core network and the terminal device. It can be used for the terminal device to register into the network and to establish a PDU session. , in the process of configuring terminal device policies on the network side.
  • N2 interface It is the interface between the AMF network element and the RAN device, and is used to transmit radio bearer control information from the core network to the RAN device.
  • N3 interface It is the interface between the (R)AN equipment and the UPF network element, used to transfer the service data of the terminal equipment between the RAN equipment and the UPF network element.
  • N4 interface It is the interface between the SMF network element and the UPF network element. It is used to transmit the information between the control plane and the user plane. It can be used for the control plane terminal equipment to complete the network access operation according to the contract information with the operator.
  • N6 interface It is the interface between the UPF network element and the DN, and is used to transfer the service data of the terminal equipment between the UPF network element and the DN.
  • N7 interface It is the interface between the PCF network element and the SMF network element, and is used to deliver information such as PDU session granularity and service data flow granularity control policy.
  • N8 interface It is the interface between the AMF network element and the UDM network element. It is used by the AMF network element to obtain the subscription data and authentication data related to access and mobility management from the UDM network element, and the AMF network element to register the terminal with the UDM network element. Information about the current mobility management of the device, etc.
  • N10 interface It is the interface between the SMF network element and the UDM network element. It is used by the SMF network element to obtain the session management related subscription data from the UDM network element, and the SMF network element to register the current session related information of the terminal device to the UDM network element.
  • N11 interface It is the interface between the SMF network element and the AMF network element, which is used to transfer the PDU session tunnel information between the RAN device and the UPF network element, the control message sent to the terminal device, and the radio resource control information sent to the RAN device. Wait.
  • data network a communication network used to provide data transmission services, specifically a public data network (PDN), such as the Internet (internet), internet protocol (internet protocol, IP) multimedia system (IP Multi-media subsystem, IMS) voice call service, etc., it can also be operator service, Internet service or third-party service, etc.
  • PDN public data network
  • IP internet protocol
  • IMS IP Multi-media subsystem
  • the identification of the data network is the data network name (DNN).
  • a specific service application (application, APP) in the terminal device may perform data communication with the DN by means of session transfer, where the session may be an IP, Ethernet, unstructured and other type of session.
  • URSP User routing policy
  • the establishment of the PDU session is triggered by the terminal device based on the service initiated.
  • Different services have different attributes to the PDU session, such as network slice (network slice), DNN, session and service continuity mode (session and service continuity mode, SSC mode). ) and so on have different requirements, so the terminal device may trigger the establishment of different PDU sessions based on different services. Therefore, URSP is introduced in 5G for the terminal device to determine whether the initiated service can use an existing PDU session for data transmission, or whether a new PDU session can be used to transmit the data of the service.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device performs URSP matching according to the initiated service, it can obtain the corresponding PDU session parameters according to the matched URSP. If there is a PDU session that meets the parameter requirements, the PDU session is used for data transmission; if there is no PDU session that meets the parameter requirements. , you can create a new PDU session for data transmission.
  • URSP mainly includes two parts: traffic descriptor (traffic descriptor) and route selection descriptor (route selection descriptor).
  • the service flow descriptor mainly includes parameters such as application ID (app ID), DNN, IP triplet (IP descriptor), domain descriptor (domain descriptor), connection capabilities (connection capabilities).
  • Packet detection rule On the network side, in the process of managing PDU sessions for terminal devices, SMF exchanges information with UPF through the N4 interface, and controls UPF to create, modify, and delete corresponding PDU sessions.
  • a terminal (UE) N4 session (N4 session) is used to control the processing of data packets by the UPF.
  • the SMF issues various data packet processing rules (such as PDR and corresponding forwarding action rules (FAR)) to the terminal N4 session in the UPF to complete the processing of data packets (or data packets by the UPF).
  • data packets the UPF processes the received external service data packets according to the data packet processing rules issued by the SMF.
  • the PDR is used to match data packets (data packets), and the FAR is used to indicate the packet forwarding mode.
  • the N4 session is also referred to as a packet forwarding control protocol (packet forwarding control protocol, PFCP) session.
  • packet forwarding control protocol packet forwarding control protocol
  • the PDR is delivered to the UPF by the SMF during the PDU session management process, and the UPF performs the corresponding data packet matching according to the PDR delivered by the SMF, and thus obtains the corresponding FAR to complete packet forwarding.
  • a PDR contains a packet detection information (PDI) parameter, and a PDI parameter contains one or several matching fields, which are used to match the data packets received by the UPF to identify the data packets and complete the data packets.
  • PDI packet detection information
  • PDI mainly includes the following information:
  • TEID tunnel endpoint identity document
  • F-TEID full qualified TEID
  • IP address of terminal device IP address of terminal device
  • SDF service data flow filter
  • filter(s) application ID
  • application ID application ID
  • the UPF After the UPF obtains the PDR from the SMF, when it receives a data packet, it matches the fields of the packet header of the data packet with the parameters defined by the PDI in the PDR, and finds the N4 session and N4 session to which the data packet belongs. The PDR rule with the highest priority matching relationship with the data packet completes the packet matching. After the UPF completes the PDR matching, the matched PDR rule contains the corresponding FAR indication, and the UPF will complete the forwarding of the data packet according to the corresponding FAR indication.
  • FAR mainly instructs UPF to process data packets through the following information:
  • This parameter is used to indicate whether UPF needs to forward, cache, copy, discard data packets, or buffer downlink data with or without notification to the control plane (such as SMF). message; or used to indicate whether UPF allows the terminal device to join the IP multicast group.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of processing a data packet corresponding to a data packet by the UPF.
  • the UPF matches the N4 session (N4 session/PFCP session) information according to the PDR matching conditions, and then matches the PDR with the highest priority in the N4 session, and then completes the data according to its corresponding FAR. Packet forwarding.
  • N4 session N4 session/PFCP session
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the UPF performing forwarding processing on a data packet.
  • UPF's forwarding of data packets mainly includes the following two processes:
  • the upstream data message from the terminal device reaches the N3 interface through the access network device, and the UPF matches the upstream data message with parameter information such as the data message source port and the tunnel identifier (wherein, the specific matching parameters are detailed as above.
  • the PDR parameter information shown in Table 3) obtains the source terminal N4 session, and performs PDR matching on the source terminal N4 session according to the service data flow filter, determines the corresponding FAR, and forwards the data packet according to the forwarding rule indicated by the FAR .
  • the processing performed by the UPF exemplarily shown in FIG. 3 on the uplink data packet from the terminal device is: forwarding the uplink data packet to the data network side through the N6 interface.
  • the downlink data message from the data network enters the UPF through the N6 interface, and the UPF obtains the destination terminal N4 session and PDR matched by the downlink data message by matching parameter information such as the data message source port, network instance, and destination IP address. rule, and determine the corresponding FAR, and forward the data packet according to the forwarding rule indicated by the FAR.
  • the processing performed by the UPF exemplarily shown in FIG. 3 on the downlink data packet from the data network is: forwarding the downlink data packet to the terminal device through the N3 interface.
  • Virtual network group The 5G LAN service is defined in the 3GPP 23.501 communication protocol, which can build a virtual mobile private network for users in the mobile network.
  • the terminal device can exchange data with the data network by establishing a traditional PDU connection.
  • 5G LAN On this basis, the concept of virtual network group (VN group) is introduced.
  • a 5G VN group corresponds to a 5G LAN, and can include multiple terminal devices.
  • the terminal devices belonging to the same 5G VN group access the mobile network and can communicate with the data network as well as with the 5G VN group. Communication with other terminal devices.
  • multiple 5G VN groups can be supported in the 5G mobile network at the same time.
  • Terminal devices under the same 5G VN group can communicate with each other through the same or different PDU session anchor (PSA) UPFs. Terminal devices between them are isolated from each other.
  • PSA PDU session anchor
  • FIG 4a is a schematic diagram of the user plane architecture of a scenario where data of a terminal device in a 5G VN group is locally exchanged in a PSA UPF.
  • multiple terminal devices such as UE1, UE2 under the same 5G VN group are registered in the same PSA UPF network element.
  • the PSA UPF network element is divided into UE1 and UE2 to complete the data with the data network
  • the PSA UPF network element also acts as the local switch of the 5G VN group to complete the data exchange between UE1 and UE2.
  • Figure 4b is a schematic diagram of the user plane architecture of a scenario where terminal equipment in a 5G VN group exchanges data across PSA UPFs.
  • multiple terminal devices such as UE1 and UE2 under the same 5G VN group are registered in different PSA UPF network elements.
  • N19 interfaces are added between different PSA UPF network elements, which belong to When UE1 and UE2 of the same 5G VN group exchange data, their corresponding PSA UPF network elements will complete data transmission and interaction through the N19 interface channel respectively.
  • the intermediate UPF Intermediate UPF, I-UPF
  • I-UPF Intermediate UPF
  • the PSA UPF network element is used as an uplink classifier (uplink classifier, UL-CL) Directs data flow from end devices to the data network, or acts as a branch point to support multi-homed PDU sessions.
  • uplink classifier uplink classifier
  • the data network is usually identified by the data network name (DNN).
  • DNN data network name
  • the relevant protocol defines a 1:1 relationship between the DNN of the data network and the 5G VN group, that is, a DNN corresponds to a 5G VN group , that is, a data network corresponds to a 5G VN group, so the 5G LAN corresponding to the 5G VN group can only support access to the data network corresponding to the 5G VN group.
  • the networking relationship in which the DNN and 5G VN groups are 1:1 can refer to the relevant definitions in the current 3GPP 23.501 protocol.
  • 5G VN groups can be created, configured and managed by the network side.
  • the relevant information of the 5G VN group mainly includes the following contents:
  • the identification of the VN group includes an external group identification (External Group ID) and an internal group identification (Internal Group ID).
  • the external group identifier is defined by the AF on the network side and used to uniquely identify a VN group;
  • the internal group identifier is defined by the UDM on the network side and used to uniquely identify a VN group inside the network side.
  • VN group membership the membership of a VN group includes a list of terminal equipment members belonging to the same VN group. Each member, that is, a terminal device, is uniquely identified by its identification information, wherein the identification information may be a generic public subscription identifier (GPSI), which is a unique user identification provided by the data network for the terminal device.
  • GPSI generic public subscription identifier
  • GPSI list A list of VN group members, where each member is identified by its GPSI External group ID ID of the VN group
  • Configuration information of a VN group (also referred to as VN group data):
  • the configuration information of a VN group includes several attribute fields, which are used to define parameters of various aspects of a VN group.
  • a local area network is a computer communication network that connects various computers, external devices and databases within a local geographic range (such as schools, factories, etc.).
  • the local area network can be connected with the remote local area network, database or processing center through the data communication network or special data circuit to form a large-scale information processing network system.
  • the local area network in 5G is called 5G LAN, which is a communication network that directly provides local area network services by using the wide coverage characteristics of the mobile network itself.
  • 5G LAN can be used in a wider range of mobile network coverage, and user equipment that joins the same 5G LAN can realize local area network-based data exchange and communication. Utilizing the already wide coverage of the mobile network, the creation of 5G LAN services and their scaling, migration, and adjustment can be done automatically by the network side without manual intervention.
  • 5G LAN can also be customized on demand, and different 5G LANs are securely isolated from each other.
  • the current 5G LAN network provides users with a simple and efficient 5G VN group management portal through NEF capability opening, which can support users to create, modify, delete and other management operations on 5G VN groups. Create, modify, delete and other management operations performed by the group.
  • the existing network deployment method in which one DNN corresponds to one 5G VN group is adopted, each time the user adds, deletes and modifies the 5G VN group, the 5G LAN network needs to add, delete and modify the 5G VN group while performing the corresponding operation.
  • the DNN of the corresponding data network, and adding or deleting the DNN will involve the internal configuration of the 5G mobile network and the configuration of the interface data channel between the 5G network and the data network.
  • the terminal device can only perform data communication through the PDU session corresponding to the 5G VN group after accessing the 5G VN group.
  • a terminal device When a terminal device currently accesses a 5G VN group, it needs to determine which 5G VN group to access based on the identification information of the data network.
  • the terminal device can only determine one 5G VN group that can be accessed according to the identification information of the data network. Therefore, after the identification information of the data network is determined, the 5G VN group that the terminal device can access is also unique. It is certain that the terminal device can only transmit data through the session in the 5G VN group, which greatly limits the flexibility of the terminal device to select the session service and use the session service for data communication.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is used to improve the flexibility of a terminal device to select a session service and use the session service for data communication, thereby improving the flexibility and efficiency of the terminal device to perform data communication, and at the same time, Reduce the complexity of VN group management, and then meet the needs of users to manage VN groups simply and quickly.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system to which the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is applied.
  • FIG. 5 exemplarily lists some network elements and devices related to the embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 only takes the 5G communication system as an example for description.
  • this communication architecture does not limit the communication architecture used by the method provided in this application, and the architecture can also be any of the following communication systems: 5G communication system, future new generation communication system, and communication system based on the above Evolved communication systems.
  • the communication architecture described in the embodiments of the present application is for the purpose of illustrating the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, and does not constitute a limitation on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the development of the network and the evolution of the network architecture, the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems and scenarios.
  • the communication architecture shown in FIG. 5 is composed of terminal equipment, access network (R)AN equipment, core network and data network.
  • the core network includes AMF network elements, SMF network elements, UPF network elements, PCF network elements, AF network elements, UDM network elements, network slice selection function (NSSF) network elements, authentication server function (authentication server function) , AUSF) network element, network slice specific authentication and authorization function network element (Network Slice Specific Authentication and Authorization Function, NSSAAF) network element and other network elements.
  • NSSAAF Network Slice Specific Authentication and Authorization Function
  • the access network equipment and the core network provide a data exchange service for the terminal equipment and the data network, and this service is called a PDU connection service.
  • the terminal device obtains the PDU connection service by initiating a PDU session establishment request to the network side.
  • the network side maintains PDU sessions for terminal devices to provide PDU connection services.
  • the network side may be the core network, or one or more network elements in the core network, or other network systems capable of implementing the functions of the core network or implementing the functions of one or more network elements in the core network , equipment, etc.
  • the network side can be 5G LAN, mobile operator network, etc.
  • the network side can also include access network or access network equipment.
  • the communication path (shown by the thick solid line) between the terminal equipment, the access network equipment, the UPF network element and the data network is the service data exchange path between the terminal equipment and the data network, and the path is The data service path of the terminal device in the network is the data plane path.
  • the communication paths (shown in dashed lines) between network elements such as terminal equipment, access network equipment, AMF network elements, SMF network elements, PCF network elements, UPF network elements, and UDM network elements are the signaling plane flow for establishing a PDU session.
  • the terminal device In order to realize the exchange of service data between the terminal device and the data network, the terminal device needs to establish a PDU session based on the data network through the PDU connection service provided by the network side.
  • the establishment of the PDU session includes two basic processes: the terminal device registers with the network side to access the network
  • the process and the process of the terminal device requesting the network side to establish a PDU session please refer to the related introduction below.
  • the above two processes belong to the signaling plane interaction process between the terminal device and the network side.
  • the general registration process of terminal equipment can be simply described as: the terminal equipment sends a registration request to the AMF through the access network equipment, and the AMF obtains the subscription data from a specific UDM according to the user identity of the terminal equipment.
  • the AMF can also initiate a user policy control establishment request (UE policy control_create) and an access management policy control establishment request (AM policy control_create) to the PCF, which are used to obtain the user policy and the access control policy, respectively.
  • UE policy control_create user policy control establishment request
  • AM policy control_create access management policy control establishment request
  • the network side After a series of authentication and authorization operations, the network side finally confirms that the terminal device is allowed to access the network.
  • the AMF responds to the registration request of the terminal device and delivers relevant policy information to the terminal device, and the terminal device completes the network registration and residency.
  • the AMF on the network side maintains the registration and access information of the terminal equipment, and performs mobility management on the terminal equipment.
  • Communication between two network devices in a 5G communication system can be implemented through corresponding interfaces, as shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 5 for details.
  • N1 to N15, N22, N35, N36, N58, and N59 shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 5 are used in the 5G network to support equipment and equipment, equipment and network elements, network elements and network elements.
  • the communication interface or reference point for information transmission between network elements can refer to the definition in 5G-related communication standards.
  • the above network elements in a 5G communication system can be either network elements implemented on dedicated hardware, software instances running on dedicated hardware, or a virtualization platform (such as a cloud platform) An instance of a virtualization function.
  • the embodiments of the present application do not limit the distribution form of each network element in the communication system.
  • each of the above network elements may be deployed in different physical devices, or multiple network elements may be integrated into the same physical device.
  • each network element may have other names; for example, when multiple network elements are integrated into the same physical device , the physical device can also have another name.
  • the AMF network element is abbreviated as AMF
  • the SMF network element is abbreviated as SMF
  • the PCF network element is abbreviated as PCF
  • the UPF network element is abbreviated as UPF
  • the AF network element is abbreviated as AF
  • the NEF network element is abbreviated as NEF.
  • Network side VN group configuration and management
  • the embodiments of the present application first provide a method for configuring and managing a VN group.
  • the association relationship between the DNN of the data network and the VN group is a 1:N relationship, where N is an integer not less than 1, that is, the method adopts A networking mode in which one data network corresponds to one or more VN groups, wherein the local area network corresponding to each VN group in the multiple VN groups can be connected to the data network.
  • the terminal device In this networking mode, for the same data network, multiple VN groups corresponding to the data network can access the data network through their corresponding local area networks. Based on this networking method, on the one hand, the terminal device has a larger selection space when selecting a VN group to access, thereby improving the flexibility of using the session service of the virtual network group for data communication. For example, when a terminal device communicates with a data network, it can flexibly select a VN group that is relatively more suitable for access from at least one VN group corresponding to the data network according to actual requirements such as service requirements.
  • users can conveniently and quickly perform management operations such as additions, deletions, and modifications to the VN groups under the same data network, without causing modifications to the DNN of the data network, avoiding the intervention of manual management on the data network side, so it can achieve Convenient and efficient management of VN groups.
  • the configuration and management of the VN group can be done by the network administrator or the operation administration and maintenance (OAM), or the NEF can open the service to the AF, and the AF can dynamically configure and manage it.
  • OAM operation administration and maintenance
  • NEF has opened a series of interfaces such as create, modify, delete and other functional interfaces, which are used by AF to manage VN groups, VN group members and VN group configuration information. Therefore, the network side supports The configuration management of the VN group is completed through the interaction between the AF and the NEF.
  • the management of the VN group mainly includes creating, modifying, and deleting the VN group.
  • the configuration management of the VN group can be realized by operating the information of the VN group.
  • the AF can configure different VN groups for different services initiated by the terminal device.
  • the terminal can select a corresponding VN group for access according to service requirements, and the local area network corresponding to the VN group provides services.
  • the related information of the VN group mainly includes three items of group identification of the VN group, membership of the VN group, and configuration information of the VN group.
  • the group identifier of the VN group may be an external group identifier, an internal group identifier, a group identifier assigned by the network side, a group identifier assigned by an authentication-authorization-accounting AAA server, and the like.
  • For the membership of the VN group refer to the information shown in Table 6 above.
  • the configuration information of the VN group at least includes data network information, slice information, PDU session type (PDU session type), application descriptor (application descriptor) and default group indication information, and can also include secondary authentication/authorization related information such as using 3A server (DN-AAA) can perform IP address allocation and other information; in addition, it can also include serviceable area information, address information, etc.
  • DN-AAA 3A server
  • the data network information is the data network name (DNN) of the data network
  • the slice information is single network slice selection assistance information (S-NSSAI).
  • the data network name is used to indicate the data network that the VN group supports access to;
  • the single network slice selection auxiliary information is used to indicate the network slice adopted by the VN group;
  • the session type is used to indicate the type of the session in the VN group;
  • the application descriptor is used to indicate the information of the application to which the service belongs;
  • the secondary authentication/authorization information is used to perform secondary authentication/authorization.
  • the parameter information such as the default group indication information, serviceable area information, and address information is used to support the 1:N networking of the DNN and VN groups.
  • the following parameter information will be described in detail:
  • the default group indication information is used to indicate whether the VN group is a set default VN group, and the default group indication information may be indicated by a field of whether it is a default group (is default). This field defines whether the current VN group is the default VN group set under the current DNN. This field is required, that is, it is included in the configuration information of each VN.
  • the network side can determine the default VN group according to the default group field of each VN group, and set the default VN group for the VN group.
  • the terminal device establishes a session in the default VN group.
  • the network side when the DNN of the same data network corresponds to multiple VN groups, the network side needs to select one VN group from the multiple VN groups and set it as the default VN group.
  • the serviceable area information is used to indicate the range of the geographical area that can be served by the virtual network group, and the serviceable area information may be indicated by a serviceable geographical area (available geographic area) field, which defines one or more serviceable areas of the current VN group. multiple geographic areas. This field is optional, that is, the configuration information of the VN group may or may not include this field.
  • the default 5G VN group covers the entire network, but for some terminal equipment, its resident area may be limited to relatively fixed areas. , in this case, there is a certain waste of resources in the use of the VN group covering the entire network to provide services for the terminal equipment.
  • AF when AF creates a VN group, it can define the serviceable geographical area of the VN group, and add the serviceable area information in the configuration information of the VN group to adapt to the The VN group only needs to cover some areas, which improves the resource utilization of the VN group.
  • the above-mentioned serviceable area information may be converted into tracking area information within the mobile network operator by the NEF.
  • the information of the geographic area can be marked as all (ALL), indicating that the corresponding VN group is available in the entire network of the mobile network operator.
  • ALL all
  • the field is marked as empty, it can be considered that the default value is ALL.
  • the address information is used to indicate at least one address to be assigned to the terminal device contained in the virtual network group, and the address information can be indicated by the IP segment and mask (IP segment and mask) field, which contains the corresponding virtual network.
  • IP segment and mask IP segment and mask
  • This field is optional, that is, the configuration information of the VN group may or may not include this field.
  • the AF configures the VN group so that the corresponding relationship between the DNN of the data network and the VN group is that one DNN corresponds to multiple VN groups
  • the multiple VN groups The configuration information of each VN group in the group includes its corresponding IP address segment.
  • SMF configures data packet forwarding rules for UPF, it needs to obtain the IP address segment information corresponding to the VN group, so as to configure UPF matching and forwarding rules for data packets based on the IP address segment information.
  • the SMF can obtain the address information of the VN group in at least any of the following ways:
  • the SMF is notified of the address information of the VN group.
  • the address information specifies the IP address segment information corresponding to the VN group through the IP network segment and mask field.
  • the SMF When creating a session corresponding to the VN group, the SMF obtains the address information corresponding to the VN group from the AAA server by interacting with the AAA server corresponding to the data network.
  • the address information specifies the IP address segment information corresponding to the VN group through the IP network segment and mask field.
  • VN group configuration information may also be referred to as VN group data.
  • the operator network opens some network capabilities to AF through NEF, so as to support AF to control users more flexibly.
  • the current NEF support and open capabilities include: allowing AF to subscribe to the network side through NEF for event information such as user location, terminal reachability events, connection status, roaming status, and the number of terminals in the area, and through NEF to the network via UDM/UDR/PCF
  • the side configuration sends messages such as parameter configuration requests, application routing requests, and service authorization requests.
  • the following takes the 5G LAN scenario as an example to introduce the process of AF's VN group management through NEF's network capability opening.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a method for AF configuration management of a 5G VN group provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 6, the method flow includes:
  • S601 The AF calls the relevant capabilities opened by the NEF to manage the 5G VN group by sending a parameter setting-create/update/delete request message to the NEF.
  • the parameter setting-create/update/delete request message may be an Nnef_Parameter Provision_Create/Update/Delete Request message.
  • the AF for the request from the user to create a 5G VN group, the AF carries a VN group identifier such as an external group identifier in the parameter setting-create request message sent to the NEF, and the external group identifier is used to uniquely identify a 5G VN group.
  • the AF For the update 5G VN group request, the AF carries the VN group identifier such as the external group identifier and the configuration information of the 5G VN group (as shown in Table 7 above) in the parameter setting-update request message sent to the NEF, or carries the 5G VN group Member management parameters (as shown in Table 6 above).
  • the AF can also request the NEF to delete the corresponding 5G VN group by sending a parameter setting-deletion request message to the NEF.
  • the NEF sends a parameter setting-create/update/delete request message to the UDM, requesting the UDM to perform corresponding operations on the subscription data corresponding to the VN group.
  • the parameter setting-create/update/delete request message may be a Nudm_Parameter Provision_Create/Update/Delete Request message.
  • the NEF after receiving the parameter setting-create/update/delete request message sent by the authorized AF, the NEF requests the UDM to create, update, store or delete the corresponding subscription data through the Nudm_Parameter Provision_Create/Update/Delete interface provided by the UDM.
  • the NEF executes step S606 and informs the failure reason.
  • the UDM initiates data query and update through the query interface provided by the UDR, so as to complete the relevant inspection and authorization of the corresponding request of the AF.
  • the query interface may be a Uudr_DM_Query interface.
  • the UDM allocates an internal group identifier according to the request, which is used to uniquely identify the 5G VN group within the mobile network, and sends the internal group identifier to the UDR through the Nudr_DM_Create interface provided by the UDR.
  • UDM calls the Nudr_DM_Update interface provided by UDR to complete the corresponding information changes according to the AF request.
  • the UDM sends a parameter setting-create/update/delete response message to the NEF.
  • the UDM if there is an error in the process, the UDM returns the reason for the error.
  • the NEF sends a parameter setting-create/update/delete response message to the AF.
  • the parameter setting-create/update/delete response message may be an Nnef_Parameter Provision_Create/Update/Delete Response message.
  • step S602 if the NEF determines that the AF is an unauthorized AF, it returns a parameter setting-create/update/delete response message to the AF to inform the AF that the request fails. If there is an error in the process, the reason for the error is returned.
  • the process may further include the following steps:
  • S600 The NF subscribes the subscription information change notification to the UDM through a subscription message.
  • the process may further include the following steps:
  • the UDM checks and authorizes the corresponding request of the AF successfully, when the subscription data corresponding to the VN group changes, the UDM notifies the network element that has subscribed to the UDM for the subscription information change notification.
  • the network element that subscribes the subscription information change notification to the UDM is taken as an example for illustration. In practice, the network element that subscribes the subscription information change notification to the UDM is not limited to the NF.
  • the step S606 may be triggered only when the step S603 is successfully executed.
  • the NEF after the AF interacts with the NEF to complete the VN group configuration, the NEF also provides the configured VN group identification, VN group membership information, and the VN group configuration information to the UDM for storage. At the same time, the UDM The received VN group configuration information may also be stored/updated in the UDR.
  • the network side adopts a networking mode in which one data network corresponds to multiple VN groups, which can support users to conveniently and quickly perform management operations such as adding, deleting, and modifying VN groups under the same data network.
  • the VN group to be accessed can be flexibly selected in the group.
  • the network side can selectively configure the serviceable area of the VN group, reduce the waste of some network resources, and improve the resource utilization of the VN group.
  • the network side delivers the list of serviceable VN groups to the terminal device
  • a user in a networking scenario where one data network corresponds to multiple VN groups, a user can subscribe to multiple VN groups at the same time, and each VN group subscribes to its own serviceable area, which may be the entire network Coverage area or part of the network coverage area.
  • the terminal device can use the network provided by the VN group after accessing the VN group. Serve. Therefore, the terminal device can select the VN group to access according to the serviceable area information corresponding to the VN group.
  • the network side may carry the serviceable area information of the VN group in the URSP delivered to the terminal device.
  • the terminal equipment performs URSP matching, it can determine whether the corresponding VN group supports the terminal equipment access according to the serviceable area information of the VN group contained in the URSP.
  • the URSP delivered by the PCF on the network side to the terminal device includes serviceable area information of at least one VN group corresponding to the service information therein.
  • a terminal device initiates a service, it first matches the service information of the initiating service with the URSP issued by the PCF. After matching the URSP, the terminal device can match its location with the service area of the VN group in the matched URSP. The information is compared, so as to determine the VN group that can provide services for itself, and further select the VN group for access.
  • the PCF may acquire the configuration information of the virtual network group configured by the AF from the AF, the NEF or the UDR, where the configuration information of the virtual network group includes the configuration information of at least one VN group configured by the AF.
  • the configuration information of the VN group includes the serviceable area information of the VN group.
  • the network side delivers a list of serviceable VN groups corresponding to the terminal device to the terminal device, where the list includes at least one VN group currently capable of providing services for the terminal device.
  • the serviceable VN group list is used for the terminal device to perceive the serviceable VN group information in the registration area where it is currently located after registering in the network, and then complete the association between the service and the VN group according to the information.
  • the network side may deliver the serviceable VN group list corresponding to the terminal device to the terminal device in the process of registering the terminal device to the network side to access the network, or in the process of updating the configuration of the terminal device.
  • the AMF on the network side obtains the VN groups that can provide services for the terminal device by exchanging information with network elements such as UDM and PCF, and generates the corresponding serviceable VN group list. to the terminal device.
  • the serviceable area subscribed by the VN group capable of providing services for the terminal equipment covers the current location of the terminal equipment.
  • a terminal device initiates a service, after matching the URSP used according to the service information of the service initiation, it can select the VN to be accessed by combining at least one VN group included in the matched URSP and the list of serviceable VN groups issued by the AMF. Group.
  • the AMF can deliver the list of serviceable VN groups to the terminal device in any of the following ways:
  • a list of serviceable VN groups is delivered to the terminal device through a registration acceptance message.
  • the URSP delivered by the PCF to the terminal device may not include the serviceable area information of the VN group.
  • the AMF may not deliver the serviceable VN group list to the terminal device.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a network side delivering a list of serviceable VN groups in the process of registering and accessing a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 7, the process includes:
  • the terminal device sends a registration request message to the access network device.
  • S702 The access network equipment, AMF, PCF, SMF, AUSF and UDM cooperate to process the registration request of the terminal equipment.
  • the AMF sends a registration acceptance message to the terminal device through the access network device, where the registration acceptance message carries a list of serviceable VN groups delivered to the terminal device.
  • the AMF After the terminal device completes the registration procedure (registration procedure), the AMF provides the terminal device with the list of VN groups that the terminal device can serve in the current registration area through a registration accept message (registration accept message).
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a network side delivering a list of serviceable VN groups in a terminal configuration update process according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 8, the process includes:
  • S800 The AMF determines that the configuration of the terminal device is updated or the terminal device needs to be re-registered.
  • the AMF sends a terminal configuration update indication to a terminal device through an access network device, where the terminal configuration update indication carries a list of serviceable VN groups delivered to the terminal device.
  • S802a The terminal device notifies the AMF that the configuration update is completed.
  • S802b The AMF sends an SDM notification service message to the UDM.
  • S802c AMF updates access network equipment.
  • S803a The terminal device initiates a registration process in the connection management-connected state.
  • steps S803b, S803c, and S804 described below may be skipped and not executed.
  • steps S803c and S804 described below can be skipped and not executed.
  • S803c The AMF triggers the AN release procedure unless there is a PDU session associated with the emergency service.
  • S804 The terminal device initiates a registration process after entering the connection management-idle state.
  • the AMF delivers the list of serviceable VN groups to the terminal device in the terminal device registration process (as shown in FIG. 7 ) or the terminal device configuration update process (as shown in FIG. 8 ).
  • the list of serviceable VN groups may include configuration information of one or more VN groups, such as the DNN corresponding to the VN group, information about the serviceable area of the VN group in the current terminal device registration area, and the like.
  • the serviceable area in the VN group configuration information is a set of tracking areas, and the set of tracking areas is a subset of the current terminal device registration area.
  • the serviceable area information of the VN group delivered by the AMF to the terminal device is the intersection of the subscription serviceable area of the VN group and the registered area of the terminal device. For a VN group with an empty intersection, it means that the VN group is unavailable when the terminal device is in the current registration area, and the AMF does not need to add such a VN group to the list of serviceable VN groups and deliver it to the terminal device.
  • the AMF can obtain the configuration information of the VN group in various ways, such as generating the dynamic policy through the PCF, and obtaining the subscription data through the UDM.
  • the AMF updates the configuration information of the VN group on the terminal device side through the terminal device configuration update or registration process.
  • the status of the terminal equipment may be: entering the service area (IN), leaving the service area (OUT), and status unknown (Unknown).
  • the behavior of the terminal device and the network side when the terminal device is in various states may be determined by the operator's policy.
  • the terminal device can also obtain the configuration information of the VN group from the network side by specifying the identifier of the VN group, or obtain the configuration information corresponding to all the serviceable VN groups by instructing to obtain the configuration information of the VN group. List of service VN groups.
  • the network side configures and distributes the list of serviceable VN groups to inform the terminal device that when the terminal device is in the current registration area, among the multiple VN groups subscribed, the available VN groups and each serviceable VN group in the current registration area.
  • the serviceable area corresponding to the VN group when the serviceable area of the VN group changes, the network side notifies the terminal device of the updated serviceable VN group list through the terminal configuration update process. Therefore, the terminal device can flexibly select a VN group to be accessed from among at least one VN group that can be served according to actual requirements, thereby improving the flexibility of the terminal device for data communication.
  • the network side delivers the URSP to the terminal device
  • the PCF on the network side can deliver relevant user policies to the terminal device to control the behavior of the terminal device.
  • Two user policies are defined in the current 3GPP standard, namely access network discovery and selection policy (ANDDSP) and URSP.
  • the ANDDSP can be provided by H-PCF (home PCF) and V-PCF (roaming PCF) at the same time, and is mainly used to instruct terminal equipment to select non-3GPP access network information, such as access network, access node and other information.
  • URSP is only supported by H-PCF, and is mainly used for terminal equipment to decide how to select a routing strategy for the service data flow to be transmitted, such as whether the service flow supports offloading to non-3GPP access, or selects a specific DNN, S-NSSAI, session and Information such as Session and Service Continuity Mode (SSC) mode is used to transmit the service data stream.
  • SSC Session and Service Continuity Mode
  • the URSP is mainly composed of two parts: a service flow descriptor and a routing descriptor.
  • the service flow descriptor is mainly used to describe the application attribute information corresponding to the service initiated by the terminal device, and the routing descriptor is mainly used for Used to describe data-carrying properties.
  • the service flow descriptor mainly includes parameters such as application ID (app ID), DNN, IP triplet (IP descriptor), domain descriptor (domain descriptor), connection capabilities (connection capabilities).
  • the parameter information included in the routing descriptor is shown in Table 9 below:
  • the PCF may obtain the virtual network group configuration information configured by the AF from the AF, the NEF or the UDR, where the virtual network group configuration information includes configuration information of at least one VN group configured by the AF.
  • the PCF can generate a corresponding URSP according to the acquired configuration information of the at least one VN group and deliver it to the terminal device, so that when the terminal device initiates a service, it can select or establish a session according to the URSP, thereby performing service data transmission through the session.
  • the group identification information of the VN group can be different. can also be the same.
  • the at least one VN group is configured by the network side for a service initiated by a terminal device, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage terminals accessing the virtual network group Devices, terminal devices managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network.
  • the URSP delivered by the PCF to the terminal device contains at least service information and a group identifier of at least one VN group corresponding to the service information
  • the service information is the service information of the service initiated by the terminal device.
  • the service information may specifically include the same information as the information included in the service flow descriptor in the URSP.
  • the terminal device can further determine the virtual network group to be accessed by matching the service information for initiating the service with the URSP issued by the PCF, and according to the identifier of the VN group contained in the matched URSP.
  • some or all of the URSPs contain an identifier of at least one VN group corresponding to the service information.
  • the configuration information of the at least one VN group configured by the AF obtained by the PCF network element includes serviceable area information of the at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information.
  • the service information is the service information of the service initiated by the terminal device, and the service information may specifically include the information included in the service flow descriptor shown in Table 9 above.
  • the serviceable area information is the serviceable area information of the VN group as shown in Table 7 above.
  • the configuration information may further include at least one of the following: data network name; single network slice selection auxiliary information; session type; application descriptor; secondary authentication/authorization information; information; address information.
  • data network name For details, refer to the corresponding information shown in Table 7 above.
  • the URSP may further include serviceable area information of the at least one virtual network corresponding to the service information.
  • the terminal device can determine whether the selected VN group is an accessible VN group.
  • the serviceable area information is optional information.
  • the PCF can choose whether to add the serviceable area information in the URSP delivered to the terminal device. After the terminal device matches the URSP used by the service, if it is determined that the matched URSP contains serviceable area information, the terminal device can determine whether the corresponding VN group supports its own access according to the serviceable area information, and further select access. If it is determined that the matched URSP does not contain serviceable area information, the terminal device can consider that the VN group corresponding to the URSP is available by default, and can further select the serviceable VN group list issued by the AMF. Enter the VN group.
  • the PCF network element obtains the configuration information of at least one VN group configured by the AF from other network elements on the network side, and can also obtain the identifier of each VN group and the serviceable area corresponding to the VN group at the same time, and carry it in the generated VN group.
  • the URSP is delivered to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device initiates a service, it can flexibly select the VN group that provides services for the terminal device for access according to the service information. At the same time, it can adapt to the networking scenario where one data network corresponds to multiple VN groups. .
  • terminal equipment when initiating business, data communication is carried out through sessions
  • the terminal device can initiate a specific service / During application, according to service requirements, select a VN group to access from the at least one VN group, so as to use the session in the VN group to perform service data transmission after accessing the VN group.
  • the following describes in detail a method for performing data communication through a session when a terminal device initiates a service.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 9, the method includes:
  • a terminal device When initiating a target service, a terminal device selects a target virtual network group from at least one virtual network group according to service information of the target service; wherein, the at least one virtual network group is configured by the network side for the target service , each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage terminal devices accessing the virtual network group, and the terminal devices managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network.
  • the terminal device when the terminal device determines that a target service needs to be initiated, it first matches the URSP, and selects a target URSP that matches the service information of the target service in at least one URSP, wherein the target URSP includes all The service information and the group identifier of at least one available VN group corresponding to the service information. Then, in the at least one VN group, the target VN group included in the at least one available VN group is selected. After determining the target VN group, the terminal device selects the target session that matches the target URSP in the established session; or sends a session creation request to the SMF, requesting the SMF to create the target session, so as to use the target session Session for data communication. Wherein, the session creation request carries the group identifier of the target VN group.
  • the above-mentioned at least one URSP may be delivered to the terminal device by the PCF before the terminal device initiates the target service.
  • the above-mentioned at least one VN group may be part or all of the VN groups included in the serviceable VN group list delivered by the AMF to the terminal device, wherein the serviceable virtual network group list includes the target virtual network group.
  • the terminal device before the terminal device performs URSP matching to determine the target VN group, the terminal device receives the at least one URSP issued by the PCF.
  • the terminal device may also receive a list of serviceable VN groups delivered by the AMF.
  • the list of serviceable VN groups obtained by the AMF may be obtained from the PCF, or obtained by the AMF in other ways.
  • the service information of the target service is sequentially matched with the service flow descriptor of at least one URSP received before. If a specific URSP is matched (the URSP may also be a set default URSP, for example, the service flow descriptor is a URSP in the form of a match-all), then the URSP is determined as a target URSP, wherein the target URSP may contain group identifiers of one or more VN groups, and the VN groups corresponding to these group identifiers can provide services for the target service.
  • the terminal device After determining the target URSP, the terminal device determines one VN group as the target VN group according to the at least one VN group and the group identifiers of one or more VN groups included in the target URSP. Specifically, when the at least one VN group is all the VN groups included in the serviceable VN group list issued by the PCF, the terminal device may select the priority among the multiple routing descriptors according to the priorities of the URSP. The VN group corresponding to the highest routing descriptor (RSD) and included in the serviceable VN group list is used as the target VN group; or any one of the same routing descriptor is included in the serviceable VN group The VN group in the group list is used as the target VN group.
  • RSD routing descriptor
  • the terminal device After the terminal device determines the target VN group, it then judges whether there is an existing session in the established session that conforms to the definition of the routing descriptor in the target URSP. If there is information such as DNN, S-NSSAI, SSC mode and VN group identifier corresponding to the existing session consistent with the information in the service flow descriptor of the target URSP, the terminal device can choose to carry the service in the existing session, or initiate the For modification of an existing session, the modified session is used to carry services. If none of the established sessions can match the routing descriptor information of the target URSP, the terminal device initiates a session creation request for the target service to request the SMF to establish a corresponding target session for the target service.
  • the terminal device initiates a session creation request for the target service to request the SMF to establish a corresponding target session for the target service.
  • the session may be a session of an IP type, an Ethernet type, or the like.
  • the group identifier may be any one of an external group identifier, an internal group identifier, a group identifier assigned by the network side, and a group identifier assigned by the authentication-authorization-accounting AAA server.
  • the session carrying the data service is an IP type session (PDU session) as an example for description.
  • PDU session IP type session
  • a terminal device When a terminal device initiates a modification to an existing PDU session, it can initiate a PDU session modification request based on the existing PDU session.
  • the request message can carry parameters including the current PDU session ID (PDU Session ID), N1 SM Container (PDU session ID), and N1 SM Container (PDU session ID). Modify the request (PDU session ID, packet filters, Operation, Requested QoS)); the PDU session ID is used to associate the AMF with the specific session context, and the N1 SM Container is transparently transmitted by the AMF. to SMF.
  • the session creation request carries the group identifier of the target VN group determined through the above URSP matching, and the SMF receives the After the session creation request carrying the group identifier is reached, the target VN group is determined according to the identifier, and a target session in the target VN group is established to carry the target service initiated by the terminal device.
  • the terminal device sends the session creation request to the AMF, and the AMF sends the request to the SMF.
  • the session creation request sent by the terminal device to the AMF also carries the newly allocated PDU session identifier and the matched parameters such as DNN, S-NSSAI, and N1 SM Container (SSC mode, PDU session type) in the routing descriptor of the URSP.
  • the newly allocated PDU session identifier is used to identify the PDU session corresponding to the session creation request
  • the DNN and S-NSSAI are used as the parameters for the AMF to select the SMF network element entity for the session creation request
  • the N1 SM Container is transparently transmitted by the AMF. to the selected SMF.
  • the terminal device determines a target session of the target service in the target virtual network group, and performs data transmission through the target session.
  • the terminal device After the above-mentioned terminal device determines the target session for carrying the target service by adopting an existing session, modifying an existing session, or creating a new session, etc., it can communicate with other terminals in the target data network and the target virtual network group through the target session.
  • the device or terminal devices in other virtual network groups perform data transmission, wherein the other virtual network groups are virtual network groups other than the target virtual network group.
  • a terminal device when a terminal device initiates a service, it can flexibly select a target VN group to access in at least one VN group configured for the terminal service on the network side according to the service information, and perform data processing through the session in the target VN group.
  • the communication improves the flexibility of the terminal equipment to access the local area network (corresponding to the VN group), and further improves the flexibility and efficiency of the terminal equipment for data communication.
  • the general PDU session establishment process can be simply described as: the terminal device sends a session creation request to create a PDU session to the AMF through the access network device, the AMF selects the SMF to provide the session service for the terminal device, and saves the corresponding relationship between the selected SMF and the PDU session.
  • the session creation request is sent to the SMF, and the SMF selects the corresponding UPF for the terminal device to establish a user plane transmission path, and assigns an IP address to it to complete the creation of the PDU session.
  • the SMF will also initiate a policy control session establishment request to the PCF to establish a policy control session between the SMF and the PCF.
  • the SMF will save the policy control session and the PDU session. Correspondence .
  • a terminal device in the scenario where the DNN of one data network corresponds to multiple VN groups, a terminal device can subscribe to multiple VN groups at the same time. Therefore, when the terminal device initiates the establishment of a PDU session, it needs to add It is used to select the relevant parameters of the VN group to ensure that the terminal equipment can access the specified target VN group as expected.
  • the terminal device carries the group identifier of the VN group to be accessed in the PDU session creation request initiated to the SMF.
  • the SMF After receiving the PDU session creation request from the terminal device, the SMF determines that the VN group corresponding to the group ID carried in the request is the target VN group accessed by the terminal device, and the SMF establishes the session under the target VN group as the target session.
  • the AF After configuring the VN group, the AF provides the information of the VN group to the UDM for storage. Therefore, the SMF can obtain the configuration information of the VN group from the UDM, and then create a PDU session under the VN group according to the configuration information of the VN group.
  • the SMF before establishing a target session for a terminal device, the SMF first obtains virtual network group configuration information from the UDM, where the virtual network group configuration information includes configuration information corresponding to at least one VN group.
  • the configuration information includes at least one of the following: default group indication information; serviceable area information; address information; wherein the default group indication information is used to indicate whether the VN group is a set default Virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the range of geographical areas that the VN group can serve; the address information is used to indicate at least one address to be allocated to the terminal device contained in the VN group, and for details, refer to Table 7 above information shown.
  • the SMF can create a target session according to the configuration information of the VN group to carry the data service of the terminal device when receiving a session creation request from the terminal device, that is, a PDU session creation request.
  • a session creation request from the terminal device that is, a PDU session creation request.
  • the SMF determines the default VN group according to the default group indication information in the VN group configuration information, and establishes the default VN group. PDU session.
  • the session creation request is a request sent by the terminal device when initiating a target service
  • the target virtual network group is included in at least one virtual network group configured on the network side for the target service
  • each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, and the terminal equipment managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network
  • the at least one VN includes the The target virtual network group.
  • the SMF after the SMF establishes a PDU session for the terminal device, it can allocate an address to the terminal device according to address information included in the configuration information of the target VN group accessed by the terminal device.
  • the SMF can send the group ID of the target VN group to the AAA server, and after receiving the group ID, the AAA server can determine the corresponding target VN group according to the group ID, and then according to the configuration information corresponding to the target VN group, the terminal Device assigned address.
  • the configuration information corresponding to the target VN group includes address information corresponding to the target VN group.
  • the address may be an IP address.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a process of creating a PDU session according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 10, the method includes:
  • S1001 The terminal device sends a PDU session creation request to the AMF.
  • the PDU session creation request may be a PDU Session Establishment Request message.
  • an optional parameter is added to the PDU session creation request: the identification information of the VN group, which is used to indicate the target VN group to be accessed by the terminal device.
  • S1002 The AMF performs SMF selection.
  • S1003 The AMF sends a PDU session creation request to the selected SMF.
  • the PDU session creation request may be a PDU session establishment SM context request message (Nsmf_PDU Session_Create SM Context Request) message.
  • a parameter is added to the SM context request message for establishing the PDU session: the identification information of the VN group, which is used to indicate the target VN group to be accessed by the terminal device.
  • the SMF After receiving the PDU session creation request sent by the AMF, the SMF obtains or updates the user subscription information according to the request, including the following steps S1004a and S1004b:
  • S1004a If the PDU session creation request carries the VN group identifier, the SMF obtains the subscription data of the VN group corresponding to the identifier.
  • S1004b If the PDU session creation request does not carry the VN group identifier, the SMF obtains the subscription data of the set default VN group.
  • the SMF determines that the PDU session creation request initiated by the terminal device carries the VN group identifier.
  • the SMF obtains the relevant subscription data of the VN group specified by the terminal device through the UDM; if the SMF determines that the VN group identification information is not carried in the PDU session creation request, the SMF obtains the corresponding subscription through the default VN group corresponding to the DNN of the data network data, wherein, if the terminal device does not subscribe to the default VN group corresponding to the current DNN, the SMF determines that the establishment of the PDU session fails.
  • the SMF determines whether the data network to be accessed by the current terminal device belongs to the 5G LAN network according to the S-NSSAI and DNN information carried in the PDU session creation request, and according to the local configuration or subscription information.
  • S1005 The SMF sends a PDU session creation response to the AMF.
  • the PDU session creation response may be a PDU session establishment SM context response message (Nsmf_PDU Session_Create SM Context Request) response message.
  • S1006 PDU session authentication/authorization.
  • the SMF can perform secondary authentication through the DN-AAA server and assign the IP address of the terminal equipment.
  • the DNN and VN groups are 1:N networking. Therefore, multiple VN groups belong to the same data network, and multiple VN groups under one data network have their own non-conflicting IP address segments.
  • SMF interacts with the DN-AAA server, performs secondary authentication and assigns IP addresses to terminal devices, and adds the identification information of the VN group to which the terminal device is to access, then the DN-AAA server can access the VN group from the VN through the DN-AAA server according to the identification information of the VN group. Assign IP addresses to terminal devices in the address segment corresponding to the group.
  • the identification information of the VN group may specifically be an external group identifier, an internal group identifier, a group identifier allocated to the VN group by the network side, a group identifier allocated to the VN group by the AAA server, or other formal parameters.
  • the SMF After the SMF successfully establishes a PDU session, that is, the target session, it notifies the terminal device. After the terminal device determines the PDU session, it can send service data packets through the PDU session during the process of processing the target service. Use the service data message to complete data transmission with the target data network, other terminal devices in the target virtual network group, or terminal devices in other virtual network groups, wherein the other virtual network groups are the ones other than the target virtual network group.
  • the session creation request carries the group identifier of the target VN group to be accessed, and the SMF can determine the target to be accessed by the terminal device according to the group identifier. VN group, and then create a corresponding PDU session to carry the data service of the terminal device.
  • the above process is adapted to the networking scenario in which one data network corresponds to multiple VN groups, avoiding the problem that SMF cannot create correct PDU sessions in the scenario of multiple VN groups.
  • the process that the terminal device sends service data packets through the PDU session to complete data communication with other objects belongs to the data plane path of the terminal device in the network, that is, the data service path shown by the dotted line in FIG. 5 . Based on this path, the terminal device sends the service data packet in the process of processing the target service to the UPF on the network side. After receiving the service data packet from the terminal device, the UPF forwards the packet according to the packet forwarding policy indicated by the SMF. The service data message is forwarded, so that the service data message is forwarded to the data network or other terminal equipment, so as to realize data communication from the terminal equipment to the data network or other terminal equipment.
  • the specific implementation manner of the terminal device sending the service data message to the UPF and the UPF processing the received service data message may refer to the introduction in the fifth part below.
  • the network side processes the data packets
  • the terminal device After the terminal device completes the registration and access to the network, it can initiate a PDU session establishment request to obtain the PDU connection service on the network side. After the terminal device obtains the PDU connection service on the network side, it sends the service data packet to the UPF through the corresponding PDU session. The UPF will process the received service data packet according to certain policies, such as forwarding the service data packet to the data network. or other terminal equipment, to implement data communication from the terminal equipment to a data network or other terminal equipment.
  • the method for processing the received service data packet by the UPF is described in detail below.
  • UPF further develops the method of matching and forwarding data packets twice as shown in Figure 11 based on the one-time matching and forwarding method for data packets as shown in Figure 3.
  • Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of UPF forwarding data packets in a 5G LAN scenario.
  • the main improvements of the UPF packet forwarding mode shown in Figure 11 include:
  • the (5G) VN internal (Internal) interface is added inside the UPF, the group-level N4 session (group-level N4 Session) is added on the basis of the terminal N4 session, and the N19 interface is added between different UPFs.
  • the service data packets can be locally interacted in the UPF and sent to the destination terminal equipment in the same UPF; or can be sent through the N6 interface to the data network side; or can be sent to other UPFs through the N19 interface, and then sent to the destination terminal device under the UPF through other UPFs.
  • the process of matching and forwarding data packets by UPF mainly includes the following two scenarios:
  • UPF uses local switching to complete data exchange between terminal devices in the same VN group.
  • the detailed process is as follows: after the UPF receives the data message sent by the source terminal device to the destination terminal device through the N3 port, after PDR matching (among them, the message-based encapsulation user protocol (GPRS tunneling protocol-user, GTP-U)
  • PDR matching the message-based encapsulation user protocol (GPRS tunneling protocol-user, GTP-U)
  • GTP-U message-based encapsulation user protocol
  • the packet header is matched (the first round of PDR matching) to obtain the source terminal N4 session, and the corresponding FAR indicates that the packet is forwarded to the internal interface of the VN for the second round of PDR matching (matching is completed based on the destination IP address of the packet) to obtain the destination terminal N4 session, the corresponding FAR indicates that the packet is forwarded to the destination terminal device through the N3 interface.
  • the UPF needs to forward data packets through the N19 interface.
  • the SMF creates a corresponding group-level N4 session for the VN group on the involved PSA UPF to enable the forwarding capability of the N19 interface and the forwarding capability of the N6 interface.
  • the VN internal interface performs PDR rule matching (based on the destination IP address of the packet or the default matching condition of match-all).
  • the rules and other rules may match the group N4 session, and the corresponding FAR indicates that the data packet is sent to the data network side through the N6 interface, or the data packet is sent to the PSA UPF where the destination terminal device is located through the N19 interface. .
  • the network instance in the matching and forwarding rule attribute fields in the N4 session is assigned as the unique identifier of the VN group (for example, the internal group identifier), which is used for Indicates that the data packet belongs to the specified VN group.
  • the unique identifier of the VN group for example, the internal group identifier
  • the network instance should also be set to the specified VN group
  • the PDR whose source interface is set to the VN group its network instance should also be set to the specified VN group. VN group.
  • the above matching and forwarding processing performed by the UPF on the service data packets is performed according to the packet forwarding policy issued by the SMF.
  • the SMF is used to process the user plane path of the VN group, and the UPF is used to process the data plane path of the VN group. Therefore, the SMF will generate the PDR and FAR according to the PDU context information of the terminal devices in the VN group, and send them to the UPF, so that the UPF can The data communication of the terminal equipment can be controlled.
  • the packet forwarding policy delivered by the SMF to the UPF includes: For the received service data message, determine whether there is a packet inspection rule PDR matching the service data message in at least one packet inspection rule, if so, forward the service data message according to the PDR, otherwise, determine Whether the destination address and source address contained in the service data packet belong to the same VN group; if it is determined that the destination address and the source address belong to the same VN group, the service data packet is not forwarded, and if the destination address and source address are determined to belong to the same VN group, the service data packet is not forwarded. If the source address does not belong to the same VN group, the service data message is forwarded according to the set PDR; wherein, the packet inspection rule is used to indicate the forwarding mode adopted for the service data message.
  • the FAR corresponding to the PDR included in the PDR is used to indicate the forwarding mode adopted for the service data message, including whether to forward the service data message, and to which destination address the service data message is forwarded.
  • the set PDR can be used as the default PDR with the lowest priority.
  • the matching rule of the set PDR can be a full matching rule, and the corresponding forwarding method can be forwarding the service data packet to the data network through the N6 interface, that is, all All the service data packets of the device can match the rule, and the service data packets matching the rule will be sent to the data network through the N6 interface.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a packet forwarding policy of a UPF according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the packet forwarding policy adopted by the UPF in the embodiment of the present application will be specifically introduced below with reference to FIG. 12 .
  • the specific flow matching and forwarding rules of the packet forwarding policy adopted by UPF include the following steps:
  • the data packet enters the N3 interface: match the source terminal N4 session and PDR rule according to the interface type and tunnel ID (F-TEID) of the ingress packet, and forward the data packet to the VN according to the FAR instruction corresponding to the matched PDR rule.
  • F-TEID interface type and tunnel ID
  • the uplink service data packet sent by UE1 as shown in FIG. 12 is sent to the VN internal interface of the UPF to which UE1 belongs through the N4 session corresponding to UE1.
  • the data packet enters the N19 interface: According to the interface type of the ingress packet, the tunnel ID matches the group N4 session and the PDR rule, and according to the FAR instruction corresponding to the matched PDR rule, the packet is sent to the internal interface of the VN.
  • the data packet enters the N6 interface: According to the interface type of the ingress packet, the DNN corresponding to the data network, and the network segment to which the destination IP address of the data packet belongs, the group N4 session and the PDR rule are matched, and the FAR corresponding to the matched PDR rule is matched. Indicates that the packet is sent to the internal interface of the VN.
  • the data packet enters the VN internal interface: match the corresponding session and PDR rules according to the interface type (source interface), network instance information, destination IP address of the data packet and other parameters, including the following steps:
  • the destination IP address and the source IP address of the data packet belong to the same VN group, and the destination terminal device to which the destination IP address belongs and the source terminal device to which the source IP address belongs are under the same PSA UPF, then the destination terminal is matched.
  • the data packet is sent downlink from the N3 interface to the destination terminal device.
  • the destination IP address and the source IP address of the data packet belong to the same VN group, but the destination terminal device to which the destination IP address belongs and the source terminal device to which the source IP address belongs are not under the same PSA UPF, then the group N4 session is matched , according to the FAR indication corresponding to the matched PDR rule, send the data packet from the N19 interface to the destination PSA UPF where the destination terminal device is located.
  • the PDR rule corresponding to the data packet cannot be matched in the above two steps A and B, then check whether the destination IP address of the data packet belongs to the network segment corresponding to the current VN group, that is, according to the network segment to which the VN belongs. The destination IP address is matched. If it matches the PDR rule, the data packet is discarded according to the FAR instruction corresponding to the PDR rule to prevent the data packet whose destination IP address belongs to the corresponding network segment of the current VN group from being matched to the following step D.
  • the default PDR rules are forwarded to the N6 port to avoid loop problems between the UPF and the data network.
  • the destination IP address is matched to the default PDR rule of the group session in an all-match mode, and the FAR corresponding to the PDR rule Indicate, send the data packet from the N6 interface to the data network; or directly discard the packet if it is determined that the data network is not configured on the network side; or send the data packet from the N19 interface to the PSA UPF with a data network.
  • the rules for matching according to the destination IP address described in the above steps A and B are the highest priority matching rules
  • the rules for matching according to the network segment to which the destination IP addresses belong in the above step C are the middle priority matching rules
  • the matching rule is lower than the highest priority matching rule
  • the default matching rule described in the above step D is the lowest priority matching rule
  • the matching rule is lower than the middle priority matching rule.
  • the matching condition is that the destination IP address of the data packet is matched by the PDR rule according to the network segment to which it belongs.
  • the networking method in which one data network corresponds to multiple VN groups is adopted, by matching the network segment to which the destination IP address of the downlink data packet of the N6 interface belongs, the corresponding VN of the network segment can be obtained.
  • the group session and forwarding rules corresponding to the group finally realize the effect of distinguishing different VN groups even when the destination IP addresses of multiple downlink data packets from the data network are under the same DNN.
  • the destination IP address is the IP address of the destination terminal device in the same VN group as the source terminal device
  • the above matching and forwarding rules can be communicated locally through the PSA UPF, or through the N19 interface between different PSA UPFs. Complete the mutual communication between different terminal devices in the same VN group.
  • the destination IP address is the IP address of the destination terminal device that is not in the same VN group as the source terminal device, the destination IP address may be the IP address of the terminal device in other VN groups corresponding to the data network, or the data network. The device IP address on the side, or the destination IP address is an invalid IP address. Then the UPF may not distinguish these scenarios, but directly send data packets from the N6 interface to the data network.
  • the destination IP address of the data packet is the IP address of the device on the data network side, whether the source terminal device can communicate with the device on the data network side is determined by the configuration policy on the data network side; if the destination IP address is another device corresponding to the data network
  • the IP addresses of the terminal devices in the VN group, whether the terminal devices between the two VN groups can communicate with each other is determined by the configuration policy on the data network side. If the data network side allows the terminal devices between the two VN groups to communicate with each other, Then the data network sends the data packet back to the UPF through the N6 interface, and then the UPF forwards it to the destination IP address, otherwise the data packet is discarded.
  • the data packet for a data packet entering the internal interface of the VN, if it matches the default group session rule (least effective level rule), the data packet will be sent from the N6 interface to the data network.
  • the default group session rule that is, the destination IP address of the service data packet is the IP address in the VN network segment to which the source IP address belongs, but after the data packet enters the VN internal interface, the UPF An exception occurs during matching, and a non-default rule is not successfully matched.
  • the service data packet is sent to the data network side, but the data network side sends it back to the UPF again.
  • the first According to the matching rule of the network segment to which the destination IP address of the data packet belongs (the intermediate priority matching rule), if the rule is matched, that is, the destination IP address is the IP address under the network segment of the VN group, it is considered that an exception has occurred, and Discard the service data packet.
  • the UPF determines that the destination IP address of the service data packet belongs to the network segment of the VN group for the uplink data flow initiated by the UE in the VN group, and cannot match the corresponding forwarding rule according to the destination IP address, Then, the service data packets are discarded, which can avoid the loop problem of the packets received by the N6 port.
  • the terminal device and the core network element may include corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for performing each function.
  • the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • the terminal device and the core network device can be divided into functional units according to the foregoing method examples.
  • each functional unit can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
  • the present application further provides a communication apparatus for implementing the functions of the terminal device or the SMF or the PCF provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the communication apparatus 1300 may include a processing unit 1301 and a transceiver unit 1302 .
  • the communication apparatus 1300 may be a terminal device or SMF or PCF in any of the foregoing embodiments, or the communication apparatus 1300 may be an apparatus applied to the terminal device or SMF or PCF in any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the communication apparatus 1300 may further include a storage unit 1303 for storing program codes and data of the communication apparatus 1300 .
  • the processing unit 1301 may be a processor or a controller, for example, a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), general-purpose processor, digital signal processing (DSP), application specific integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit) circuits, ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It may implement or execute the various exemplary logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with this disclosure.
  • the processor may also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and the like.
  • the storage unit 1303 may be a memory.
  • the transceiver unit 1302 is an interface circuit of the device for receiving signals from other devices.
  • the transceiver unit 1302 is an interface circuit used by the chip to send signals to other chips or devices and/or an interface circuit used by the chip to receive signals from other chips or devices.
  • the communication apparatus 1300 when the communication apparatus 1300 implements the function of the terminal device provided by the embodiment of the present application, the communication apparatus 1300 includes at least the processing unit 1301 .
  • the processing unit 1301 is configured to select a target virtual network group from at least one virtual network group according to the service information of the target service when initiating a target service; Target service configuration, each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage terminal devices accessing the virtual network group, and the terminal devices managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network; the processing unit 1301 It is also used for determining a target session of the target service in the target virtual network group, and performing data transmission through the target session.
  • the processing unit 1301 when selecting a target virtual network group in at least one virtual network group according to the service information of the target service, is specifically configured to: in at least one user routing selection policy, select A target user routing policy matching the service information, wherein the target user routing policy includes the service information and a group identifier of at least one available virtual network group corresponding to the service information; in the at least one In a virtual network group, the target virtual network group included in the at least one available virtual network group is selected.
  • the processing unit 1301 determines the target session of the target service in the target virtual network group
  • the processing unit 1301 is specifically configured to: in the established session, select a route with the target user the target session that matches the policy; or, send a session creation request to the session management function network element, where the session creation request is used to request the creation of the target session, wherein the session creation request carries the information of the target virtual network group Group ID.
  • the communication apparatus 1300 further includes the transceiver unit 1302, and before the processing unit 1301 selects a target virtual network group in at least one virtual network group, the transceiver unit 1302 is further configured to: In the process of registering the terminal device into the network, receiving the serviceable virtual network group list issued by the access and mobility management function network element; or, in the process of updating the configuration of the terminal device, receiving the access and mobility The serviceable virtual network group list issued by the network element of the performance management function; wherein, the serviceable virtual network group list includes the target virtual network group.
  • the transceiver unit is further configured to: receive the at least one user route delivered by the policy control function network element Choose a strategy.
  • the processing unit performs data transmission through the target session, including: communicating with the target data network, other terminal devices in the target virtual network group, or other virtual network groups through the target session
  • the terminal equipment in the device performs data transmission
  • the other virtual network groups are virtual network groups other than the target virtual network group.
  • the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
  • the configuration information further includes at least one of the following: data network name; single network slice selection auxiliary information; session type; application descriptor; secondary authentication/authorization information; ; address information; wherein, the data network name is used to indicate the data network that the virtual network group supports access to; the single network slice selection auxiliary information is used to indicate the network slice adopted by the virtual network group; the session The type is used to indicate the type of the session in the virtual network group; the application descriptor is used to indicate the information of the application to which the target service belongs; the secondary authentication/authorization information is used to perform secondary authentication/authorization;
  • the default group indication information is used to indicate whether the virtual network group is a set default virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the geographic area range that the virtual network group can serve; the address information is used to indicate the virtual network The group contains at least one address to be assigned to the end device.
  • the communication apparatus 1300 when the communication apparatus 1300 implements the function of the SMF provided by the embodiment of the present application, the communication apparatus 1300 includes at least the processing unit 1301 .
  • the processing unit 1301 is configured to determine a target virtual network group according to a session creation request from a terminal device, wherein the session creation request is a request sent by the terminal device when initiating a target service, and the target virtual network group includes: In at least one virtual network group configured on the network side for the target service, each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage terminal devices accessing the virtual network group, and any virtual network group managed by any virtual network group
  • the terminal device can form a virtual local area network; the processing unit 1301 is further configured to establish a target session in the target virtual network group, and the target session is used for the terminal device to perform data transmission.
  • the communication device 1300 further includes the transceiver unit 1302, and before the processing unit 1301 determines the target virtual network group, the transceiver unit 1302 is further configured to: receive data from the unified data management function network
  • the virtual network group configuration information of the element includes configuration information corresponding to at least one virtual network group, the at least one virtual network group includes the target virtual network group, and the configuration information includes at least one of the following Item: default group indication information; serviceable area information; address information; wherein, the default group indication information is used to indicate whether the virtual network group is a set default virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the virtual network The range of the geographical area that the group can serve; the address information is used to indicate at least one address to be allocated to the terminal device contained in the virtual network group.
  • the session creation request carries the group identifier of the virtual network group.
  • the processing unit 1301 is specifically configured to: determine that the virtual network group corresponding to the group identifier is the Describe the target virtual network group.
  • the processing unit 1301 when determining the target virtual network group according to the session creation request from the terminal device, is specifically configured to: if the session creation request does not carry the group identifier of the virtual network group, according to In the virtual network group configuration information, the set default virtual network group is determined as the target virtual network group.
  • the processing unit 1301 cooperates with the transceiver unit 1302, and is further configured to: assign an address to the terminal device according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group;
  • the group identifier of the target virtual network group is sent to the AAA server, so that the AAA server determines the target virtual network group according to the group identifier, and according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group, for the The terminal equipment allocates an address; wherein, the configuration information includes the address information.
  • the transceiver unit 1302 is further configured to: deliver a data packet forwarding policy to the user plane functional network element, so that the user plane functional network element, according to the data packet forwarding policy, The received service data message is forwarded; wherein, the data message forwarding strategy includes: judging whether there is a packet inspection rule matching the service data message in at least one packet inspection rule, and if so, according to the The packet inspection rule forwards the service data message, otherwise, judge whether the destination address and the source address contained in the service data message belong to the same virtual network group; if it is determined that the destination address and the source address belong to the same virtual network group, then The service data packet is not forwarded, and if it is determined that the destination address and the source address do not belong to the same virtual network group, the service data packet is forwarded according to the set packet inspection rule; wherein the packet inspection rule is used to indicate Forwarding mode used for service data packets.
  • the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
  • the communication apparatus 1300 when the communication apparatus 1300 implements the functions of the PCF provided by the embodiments of the present application, the communication apparatus 1300 at least includes the processing unit 1301 and the transceiver unit 1302 .
  • the transceiver unit 1302 is configured to receive the virtual network group configuration information issued by the application function network element or the capability opening function network element or the unified data warehouse network element, wherein the virtual network group configuration information includes at least one virtual network group corresponding to the network element.
  • configuration information the at least one virtual network group is the target service configuration initiated by the network side for the terminal device, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, any A terminal device managed by a virtual network group can form a virtual local area network;
  • the processing unit 1301 cooperates with the transceiver unit 1302 to generate at least one user routing policy according to the virtual network group configuration information, and use the At least one user routing policy is delivered to the terminal device.
  • the user routing policy includes service information and a group identifier of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information, and the service information is service information of the target service.
  • the configuration information at least includes the service information and serviceable area information of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information; the user routing policy also includes the service information The serviceable area information of the corresponding at least one virtual network group; wherein the serviceable area information is used to indicate the range of the geographical area that the virtual network group can serve.
  • the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
  • the present application further provides a communication device, as shown in FIG. 14
  • the communication device may be an implementation of a hardware circuit of the communication device shown in FIG. 13 .
  • the communication apparatus may be adapted to perform the functions of the terminal device or the SMF or the PCF in the above method embodiments.
  • FIG. 14 only shows the main components of the communication device.
  • the communication apparatus 1400 includes at least a processor 1401 and a memory 1402 . As an implementation manner, the communication apparatus 1400 may further include a communication interface 1403 .
  • the processor 1401 is configured to execute the instructions or programs stored in the memory 1402 .
  • the processor 1401 is configured to perform the operations performed by the processing unit 1301 in the above embodiments
  • the communication interface 1403 is configured to perform the operations performed by the transceiver unit 1302 in the above embodiments.
  • the memory 1402 is used to store program instructions and/or data.
  • Memory 1402 and processor 1401 are coupled.
  • the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
  • the processor 1401 may cooperate with the memory 1402.
  • Processor 1401 may execute program instructions stored in memory 1402 . At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
  • the communication interface 1403 is used to communicate with other communication devices through a transmission medium, so that the communication device 1400 can communicate with other communication devices.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, or other types of communication interfaces.
  • the transceiver when the communication interface is a transceiver, the transceiver may include an independent receiver and an independent transmitter; the communication interface may also be a transceiver with integrated transceiver function, or an interface circuit.
  • the communication device 1400 may further include a communication line 1404 .
  • the communication interface 1403, the processor 1401 and the memory 1402 can be connected to each other through a communication line 1404;
  • the communication line 1404 can be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI for short) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (extended industry standard architecture). , referred to as EISA) bus and so on.
  • PCI peripheral component interconnect
  • EISA extended industry standard architecture
  • the communication line 1404 can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of presentation, only one thick line is shown in FIG. 14, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the processor 1401 in FIG. 14 can execute instructions by calling the computer stored in the memory 1402, so that the communication apparatus 1400 can execute the terminal device in any of the above method embodiments. Or the methods performed by SMF or PCF.
  • the functions/implementation process of the sum processing unit 1301 and the transceiver unit 1302 shown in FIG. 13 can be realized by the processor 1401 in FIG. 14 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 1402;
  • the function/implementation process of the processing unit 1301 can be implemented by the processor 1401 in FIG. 14 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 1402, and the function/implementation process of the transceiver unit 1302 shown in FIG. 13 can be implemented through the communication interface in FIG. 14 1403 to achieve.
  • each step of the above-mentioned method can be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be embodied as being executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here.
  • the processor in this embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability.
  • each step of the above method embodiments may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable chips. Programming logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • the memory in this embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • PROM programmable read-only memory
  • EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory
  • electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory electrically EPROM, EEPROM
  • flash memory electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, where the communication system may include a terminal device, an SMF, and a PCF for executing the execution of the terminal device, the SMF, and the PCF in any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the communication system may include a terminal device, an SMF, and a PCF for executing the execution of the terminal device, the SMF, and the PCF in any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the communication system may further include some or all of the access network equipment, AMF, AF, NEF, and UPF, for respectively executing the corresponding access network equipment in any of the foregoing embodiments. , AMF, AF, NEF, UPF.
  • the communication system may also include other network elements or devices in any or any of the multi-core networks described in the foregoing embodiments of the present application, and are used to implement corresponding functions, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the embodiments of the present application may be provided as a method, a system, or a computer program product. Accordingly, the present application may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present application may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including, but not limited to, disk storage, optical storage, etc.) having computer-usable program code embodied therein.
  • These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory capable of directing a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory result in an article of manufacture comprising instruction means, the instructions
  • the apparatus implements the functions specified in the flow or flow of the flowcharts and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Data Exchanges In Wide-Area Networks (AREA)

Abstract

Provided in the present application are a communication method and a communication apparatus, said method being applied in a terminal device. The method comprises: when a target service is initiated, selecting a target virtual network group from among at least one virtual network group according to service information of the target service, wherein the at least one virtual network group is configured by a network side for said target service, each virtual network group among the at least one virtual network group is used for managing a terminal device that accesses said virtual network group, and a terminal device managed by any virtual network group is able to form a virtual local area network; determining a target session of the target service in the target virtual network group, and performing data transmission by means of the target session. The communication method provided in the present application is used for improving the flexibility of a terminal device in selecting a session service and in using a session service to perform data communication.

Description

一种通信方法及通信装置A communication method and communication device
相关申请的交叉引用CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
本申请要求在2021年01月18日提交中国专利局、申请号为202110062216.0、申请名称为“一种通信方法及通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number of 202110062216.0 and the application title of "a communication method and communication device" filed with the China Patent Office on January 18, 2021, the entire contents of which are incorporated into this application by reference .
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种通信方法及通信装置。The present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a communication method and a communication device.
背景技术Background technique
第五代移动通信技术(5th generation mobile networks,5G)局域网(local area network,LAN)可以在广泛的移动网络覆盖范围内使用。无论用户是否处于同一地域,只要加入同一5G局域网,即可实现基于局域网的数据交换和通信。5th generation mobile networks (5G) local area network (LAN) can be used in a wide range of mobile network coverage. Regardless of whether users are in the same region, as long as they join the same 5G local area network, data exchange and communication based on the local area network can be realized.
目前,3GPP协议中定义了5G局域网服务,能够在网络系统如移动网络中为用户构建一个虚拟移动专网实现虚拟专网通信。同时,协议中引入了虚拟网络(Virtual Network,VN)组(Group)的概念,虚拟网络组对应的5G局域网可以为该虚拟网络组中的终端设备提供通信服务,签约了同一个虚拟网络组的终端设备在该虚拟网络组对应的5G局域网下,签约了同一个虚拟网络组的两个终端设备之间的通信具备局域网通信的特征。At present, the 5G local area network service is defined in the 3GPP protocol, which can build a virtual mobile private network for users in a network system such as a mobile network to realize virtual private network communication. At the same time, the concept of virtual network (Virtual Network, VN) group (Group) is introduced into the agreement. The 5G local area network corresponding to the virtual network group can provide communication services for the terminal devices in the virtual network group. Under the 5G local area network corresponding to the virtual network group, the communication between two terminal devices that have signed up to the same virtual network group has the characteristics of local area network communication.
在引入虚拟网络组后,不同虚拟网络组对应的5G局域网可以接入到不同的数据网络,不同虚拟网络组之间的终端设备相互隔离,接入同一个虚拟网络组的终端设备既能与该虚拟网络组对应的数据网络(data network,DN)完成数据交换,又能通过用户面功能(user planefunction,UPF)网元直接与该虚拟网络组内的其它终端设备完成数据交换。After the introduction of virtual network groups, 5G local area networks corresponding to different virtual network groups can be connected to different data networks, and terminal devices between different virtual network groups are isolated from each other. The data network (DN) corresponding to the virtual network group completes data exchange, and can directly complete data exchange with other terminal devices in the virtual network group through the user plane function (UPF) network element.
目前,终端设备需要依据数据网络的标识信息,确定发起业务时要接入的虚拟网络组,进而采用该虚拟网络组中的会话服务进行数据传输。但是,在数据网络的标识信息确定后,终端设备能够接入的虚拟网络组也是唯一确定的,终端设备也只能通过该虚拟网络组中的会话服务进行数据传输,这极大限制了终端设备选择会话服务和采用会话服务进行数据通信的灵活性。At present, the terminal device needs to determine the virtual network group to be accessed when initiating a service according to the identification information of the data network, and then use the session service in the virtual network group for data transmission. However, after the identification information of the data network is determined, the virtual network group that the terminal device can access is also uniquely determined, and the terminal device can only transmit data through the session service in the virtual network group, which greatly limits the terminal device. Flexibility to choose session services and use session services for data communication.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请提供了一种通信方法及通信装置,用以提高终端设备选择会话服务和采用会话服务进行数据通信的灵活性。The present application provides a communication method and a communication device, which are used to improve the flexibility of a terminal device in selecting a session service and using the session service for data communication.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,应用于终端设备,所述方法包括:在发起目标业务时,根据所述目标业务的业务信息,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组;其中,所述至少一个虚拟网络组为网络侧针对所述目标业务配置,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;确定所述目标业务在所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话,并通过所述目标会话进行数据传输。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is applied to a terminal device. The method includes: when initiating a target service, selecting a target virtual network in at least one virtual network group according to service information of the target service group; wherein, the at least one virtual network group is configured by the network side for the target service, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, any virtual network group The terminal equipment managed by the network group can form a virtual local area network; the target session of the target service in the target virtual network group is determined, and data transmission is performed through the target session.
在该方法中,终端设备在发起业务时,能够在网络侧针对终端业务配置的至少一个虚拟网络组中,根据业务信息灵活选择接入的目标虚拟网络组,并通过该目标虚拟网络组中 的会话进行数据通信,提高了终端设备接入虚拟网络组的灵活性,进而提高了终端设备选择和采用会话服务进行数据通信的灵活性和高效性。In this method, when initiating a service, a terminal device can flexibly select a target virtual network group to access in at least one virtual network group configured for the terminal service on the network side according to service information, and use the virtual network group in the target virtual network group The session performs data communication, which improves the flexibility of the terminal device to access the virtual network group, thereby improving the flexibility and efficiency of the terminal device selecting and using the session service for data communication.
在一种可能的设计中,所述根据所述目标业务的业务信息,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组,包括:在至少一个用户路由选择策略中,选择与所述业务信息匹配的目标用户路由选择策略,其中,所述目标用户路由选择策略包含所述业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个可用虚拟网络组的组标识;在所述至少一个虚拟网络组中,选择包含在所述至少一个可用虚拟网络组中的所述目标虚拟网络组。In a possible design, the selecting a target virtual network group from at least one virtual network group according to the service information of the target service includes: in at least one user routing policy, selecting a target virtual network group that matches the service information The target user routing policy, wherein the target user routing policy includes the service information and the group identifier of at least one available virtual network group corresponding to the service information; in the at least one virtual network group, select the target virtual network group contained in the at least one available virtual network group.
在该方法中,终端设备根据发起业务的业务信息匹配到的用户路由选择策略中包含与所述业务信息对应的至少一个可用虚拟网络组的组标识,则终端设备根据该组标识信息能够确定哪些虚拟网络组是能够为自身提供服务的,进而能够在业务可用的虚拟网络组中灵活选择接入的虚拟网络组。In this method, the user routing policy matched by the terminal device according to the service information for initiating the service includes the group identifier of at least one available virtual network group corresponding to the service information, and the terminal device can determine which ones are based on the group identifier information. A virtual network group can provide services for itself, and can flexibly select a virtual network group to access from among the virtual network groups available for services.
在一种可能的设计中,所述确定所述目标业务在所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话,包括:在已建立的会话中,选择与所述目标用户路由选择策略匹配的所述目标会话;或者,向会话管理功能网元发送会话创建请求,所述会话创建请求用于请求创建所述目标会话,其中,所述会话创建请求携带所述目标虚拟网络组的组标识。In a possible design, the determining the target session of the target service in the target virtual network group includes: in the established session, selecting the target that matches the routing policy of the target user or send a session creation request to the session management function network element, where the session creation request is used to request creation of the target session, wherein the session creation request carries the group identifier of the target virtual network group.
在该方法中,终端设备请求会话管理功能网元新建会话时,通过在发送给会话管理功能网元的会话创建请求中携带目标虚拟网络组的组标识,能够指定要接入的虚拟网络组,并使会话管理功能网元快速确定终端设备选择接入的虚拟网络组,进而为终端设备建立该虚拟网络组中的会话。In this method, when the terminal device requests the session management function network element to create a new session, the virtual network group to be accessed can be specified by carrying the group identifier of the target virtual network group in the session creation request sent to the session management function network element. The network element of the session management function can quickly determine the virtual network group that the terminal device selects to access, and then establish a session in the virtual network group for the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组之前,所述方法还包括:在所述终端设备注册入网的流程中,接收接入与移动性管理功能网元下发的可服务虚拟网络组列表;或者,在所述终端设备配置更新的流程中,接收所述接入与移动性管理功能网元下发的可服务虚拟网络组列表;其中,所述可服务虚拟网络组列表包含所述目标虚拟网络组。In a possible design, before selecting a target virtual network group in at least one virtual network group, the method further includes: in the process of registering the terminal device into the network, receiving an access and mobility management function network element or, in the process of updating the configuration of the terminal device, receiving the list of serviceable virtual network groups issued by the access and mobility management function network element; The virtual netgroup list contains the target virtual netgroup.
在该方法中,终端设备根据接入与移动性管理功能网元下发的可服务虚拟网络组列表,可直接确定能够为自身提供服务的虚拟网络组,即终端设备可接入的虚拟网络组,则终端设备在发起业务时,能够在其可接入的虚拟网络组中灵活选择最终确定接入的虚拟网络组。In this method, the terminal device can directly determine the virtual network group that can provide services for itself according to the serviceable virtual network group list issued by the access and mobility management function network element, that is, the virtual network group that the terminal device can access , the terminal device can flexibly select a virtual network group to be finally accessed from among the virtual network groups that it can access when initiating a service.
在一种可能的设计中,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组之前,所述方法还包括:接收策略控制功能网元下发的所述至少一个用户路由选择策略。In a possible design, before selecting the target virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group, the method further includes: receiving the at least one user routing policy issued by the policy control function network element.
在该方法中,终端设备在选择目标虚拟网络组之前,先获取用户路由选择策略,能够保证终端设备有可用的用户路由选择策略,进而通过用户路由选择策略匹配的方法选择目标虚拟网络组。In this method, the terminal device obtains the user routing policy before selecting the target virtual network group, which ensures that the terminal device has the available user routing policy, and then selects the target virtual network group by matching the user routing policy.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通过所述目标会话进行数据传输,包括:通过所述目标会话,与目标数据网络、所述目标虚拟网络组中的其它终端设备或其它虚拟网络组中的终端设备进行数据传输,所述其它虚拟网络组为除所述目标虚拟网络组以外的虚拟网络组。In a possible design, the data transmission through the target session includes: through the target session, communicating with the target data network, other terminal devices in the target virtual network group, or other terminal devices in other virtual network groups The terminal device performs data transmission, and the other virtual network groups are virtual network groups other than the target virtual network group.
在一种可能的设计中,所述组标识包括如下至少一项:外部组标识;内部组标识;网络侧分配的组标识;验证-授权-记账AAA服务器分配的组标识。In a possible design, the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; a group identifier assigned by the authentication-authorization-accounting AAA server.
在该方法中,终端设备能够采用多种类型的组标识进行虚拟网络组的识别和标记等,灵活性较高。In this method, the terminal device can use various types of group identifiers to identify and mark the virtual network group, and has high flexibility.
在一种可能的设计中,所述配置信息还包含如下至少一项:数据网络名称;单网络切 片选择辅助信息;会话类型;应用描述符;二次鉴权/授权信息;是否默认组指示信息;地址信息;其中,所述数据网络名称用于指示所述虚拟网络组支持接入的数据网络;所述单网络切片选择辅助信息用于指示所述虚拟网络组采用的网络切片;所述会话类型用于指示所述虚拟网络组中会话的类型;所述应用描述符用于指示所述目标业务所属应用的信息;所述二次鉴权/授权信息用于进行二次鉴权/授权;所述默认组指示信息用于指示虚拟网络组是否为设定的默认虚拟网络组;所述可服务区域信息用于指示虚拟网络组可服务的地理区域范围;所述地址信息用于指示虚拟网络组包含的至少一个待分配给终端设备的地址。In a possible design, the configuration information further includes at least one of the following: data network name; single network slice selection auxiliary information; session type; application descriptor; secondary authentication/authorization information; ; address information; wherein, the data network name is used to indicate the data network that the virtual network group supports access to; the single network slice selection auxiliary information is used to indicate the network slice adopted by the virtual network group; the session The type is used to indicate the type of the session in the virtual network group; the application descriptor is used to indicate the information of the application to which the target service belongs; the secondary authentication/authorization information is used to perform secondary authentication/authorization; The default group indication information is used to indicate whether the virtual network group is a set default virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the geographic area range that the virtual network group can serve; the address information is used to indicate the virtual network The group contains at least one address to be assigned to the end device.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,应用于会话管理功能网元,所述方法包括:根据来自终端设备的会话创建请求,确定目标虚拟网络组,其中,所述会话创建请求为所述终端设备在发起目标业务时发送的请求,所述目标虚拟网络组包含在网络侧针对所述目标业务配置的至少一个虚拟网络组中,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;建立所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话,所述目标会话用于所述终端设备进行数据传输。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is applied to a network element with a session management function. The method includes: determining a target virtual network group according to a session creation request from a terminal device, where the session creation request is: A request sent by the terminal device when initiating a target service, the target virtual network group is included in at least one virtual network group configured on the network side for the target service, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group For managing the terminal devices accessing the virtual network group, any terminal device managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network; establish a target session in the target virtual network group, and the target session is used for the terminal device data transfer.
在该方法中,网络侧针对终端业务配置有至少一个虚拟网络组,能够支持终端设备根据发起业务的业务信息灵活选择接入的目标虚拟网络组,同时网络侧的会话管理功能网元为所述终端设备建立所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话,能够实现所述终端设备的数据传输;同时能够适应一个数据网络对应多个虚拟网络组的组网场景。In this method, the network side is configured with at least one virtual network group for the terminal service, which can support the terminal device to flexibly select the target virtual network group to access according to the service information for initiating the service, and the session management function network element on the network side is the The terminal device establishes the target session in the target virtual network group, which can realize the data transmission of the terminal device; meanwhile, it can adapt to the networking scenario in which one data network corresponds to multiple virtual network groups.
在一种可能的设计中,在确定目标虚拟网络组之前,所述方法还包括:接收来自统一数据管理功能网元的虚拟网络组配置信息;所述虚拟网络组配置信息包含至少一个虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,所述至少一个虚拟网络组包含所述目标虚拟网络组,所述配置信息包含如下至少一项:默认组指示信息;可服务区域信息;地址信息;其中,所述默认组指示信息用于指示虚拟网络组是否为设定的默认虚拟网络组;所述可服务区域信息用于指示虚拟网络组可服务的地理区域范围;所述地址信息用于指示虚拟网络组包含的至少一个待分配给终端设备的地址。In a possible design, before determining the target virtual network group, the method further includes: receiving virtual network group configuration information from the unified data management function network element; the virtual network group configuration information includes at least one virtual network group Corresponding configuration information, the at least one virtual network group includes the target virtual network group, and the configuration information includes at least one of the following: default group indication information; serviceable area information; address information; wherein, the default group The indication information is used to indicate whether the virtual network group is a set default virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the range of geographical areas that the virtual network group can serve; the address information is used to indicate that the virtual network group contains at least An address to be assigned to the end device.
在该方法中,会话管理功能网元获取至少一个虚拟网络组的配置信息后,能够根据该配置信息确定目标虚拟网络组的相关信息,例如,会话管理功能网元可以根据配置信息中的默认组指示信息确定至少一个虚拟网络组中的默认虚拟网络组,进而在终端设备未指定接入的虚拟网络组时,将该默认虚拟网络组作为目标虚拟网络组来为终端设备提供服务;会话管理功能网元可以根据配置信息中的可服务区域信息确定虚拟网络组是否能够为处于某一位置区域的终端设备提供服务;会话管理功能网元还可以根据配置信息中的地址信息为接入的终端设备分配地址。In this method, after acquiring the configuration information of at least one virtual network group, the session management function network element can determine the relevant information of the target virtual network group according to the configuration information. For example, the session management function network element can determine the relevant information of the target virtual network group according to the configuration information. The instruction information determines a default virtual network group in at least one virtual network group, and then when the terminal device does not specify a virtual network group to access, the default virtual network group is used as a target virtual network group to provide services for the terminal device; session management function The network element can determine whether the virtual network group can provide services for terminal equipment in a certain location area according to the serviceable area information in the configuration information; the network element with the session management function can also provide access to the terminal equipment according to the address information in the configuration information. assign address.
在一种可能的设计中,所述会话创建请求携带虚拟网络组的组标识,所述确定目标虚拟网络组,包括:确定所述组标识所对应的虚拟网络组为所述目标虚拟网络组。In a possible design, the session creation request carries a group identifier of a virtual network group, and the determining a target virtual network group includes: determining a virtual network group corresponding to the group identifier as the target virtual network group.
在该方法中,终端设备请求会话管理功能网元新建会话时,会话管理功能网元接收到的来自终端设备的会话创建请求中携带目标虚拟网络组的组标识,因此会话管理功能网元无需进行其它相关信息的比较或匹配,就能快速直接的确定终端设备要接入的虚拟网络组,进而为终端设备建立该虚拟网络组中的会话,并能支持终端设备指定要接入的目标虚拟网络组。In this method, when the terminal device requests the session management function network element to create a new session, the session creation request received by the session management function network element from the terminal device carries the group identifier of the target virtual network group, so the session management function network element does not need to By comparing or matching other relevant information, the virtual network group to be accessed by the terminal device can be quickly and directly determined, and then a session in the virtual network group can be established for the terminal device, and the target virtual network to be accessed by the terminal device can be specified. Group.
在一种可能的设计中,所述根据来自终端设备的会话创建请求,确定目标虚拟网络组, 包括:若所述会话创建请求未携带虚拟网络组的组标识,则根据所述虚拟网络组配置信息,将设定的默认虚拟网络组确定为所述目标虚拟网络组。In a possible design, the determining the target virtual network group according to the session creation request from the terminal device includes: if the session creation request does not carry the group identifier of the virtual network group, configuring the target virtual network group according to the virtual network group information, and determine the set default virtual network group as the target virtual network group.
在该方法中,终端设备请求会话管理功能网元新建会话时,若未指定要接入的虚拟网络组,则会话管理功能网元选择默认的虚拟网络组为终端设备提供会话服务,能够在存在多个终端设备可用的虚拟网络组的场景下,也能快速确定为终端设备提供会话服务的虚拟网络组;同时能够适应一个数据网络对应多个虚拟网络组的组网场景。In this method, when the terminal device requests the session management function network element to create a new session, if the virtual network group to be accessed is not specified, the session management function network element selects the default virtual network group to provide session services for the terminal device, which can In the scenario of virtual network groups available to multiple terminal devices, the virtual network group that provides session services for terminal devices can also be quickly determined; at the same time, it can adapt to the networking scenario where one data network corresponds to multiple virtual network groups.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:根据所述目标虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,为所述终端设备分配地址;或者,将所述目标虚拟网络组的组标识发送到AAA服务器,以使所述AAA服务器根据所述组标识,确定所述目标虚拟网络组,及根据所述目标虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,为所述终端设备分配地址;其中,所述配置信息包含所述地址信息。In a possible design, the method further includes: assigning an address to the terminal device according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group; or, sending the group identifier of the target virtual network group to the AAA server, so that the AAA server determines the target virtual network group according to the group identifier, and assigns an address to the terminal device according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group; wherein the configuration information Contains the address information.
在该方法中,网络侧可以支持每个虚拟网络组包含各自的地址段,避免多个虚拟网络组的地址信息的冲突,而会话管理功能网元可以根据虚拟网络组对应的地址段,为接入所述虚拟网络组的终端设备分配地址,因此能够适应一个数据网络对应多个虚拟网络组的组网场景下的地址分配。In this method, the network side can support that each virtual network group contains its own address segment, so as to avoid the conflict of address information of multiple virtual network groups, and the session management function network element can, according to the address segment corresponding to the virtual network group, provide the The terminal equipment that enters the virtual network group allocates addresses, so it can adapt to address allocation in a networking scenario in which one data network corresponds to multiple virtual network groups.
在一种可能的设计中,所述方法还包括:向用户面功能网元下发数据报文转发策略,以使所述用户面功能网元根据所述数据报文转发策略,对接收到的业务数据报文进行转发;其中,所述数据报文转发策略包括:判断在至少一个包检测规则中是否存在与所述业务数据报文匹配的包检测规则,若是,则根据所述包检测规则转发所述业务数据报文,否则,判断所述业务数据报文包含的目的地址和源地址是否属于同一虚拟网络组;若确定所述目的地址和源地址属于同一虚拟网络组,则不转发所述业务数据报文,若确定所述目的地址和源地址不属于同一虚拟网络组,则根据设定包检测规则转发所述业务数据报文;其中,所述包检测规则用于指示对业务数据报文采用的转发方式。In a possible design, the method further includes: delivering a data packet forwarding policy to the user plane functional network element, so that the user plane functional network element, according to the data packet forwarding policy, forwards the received The service data message is forwarded; wherein, the data message forwarding policy includes: judging whether there is a packet inspection rule matching the service data message in at least one packet inspection rule, and if so, according to the packet inspection rule Forward the service data message, otherwise, determine whether the destination address and the source address contained in the service data message belong to the same virtual network group; if it is determined that the destination address and the source address belong to the same virtual network group, do not forward all The service data message, if it is determined that the destination address and the source address do not belong to the same virtual network group, the service data message is forwarded according to the set packet inspection rule; wherein, the packet inspection rule is used to indicate that the service data The forwarding method used for the packet.
在该方法中,会话管理功能网元通过向用户面功能网元下发数据报文转发策略,使用户面功能网元基于该策略对接收到的数据报文进行处理,其中,在根据该策略未匹配到与接收到的业务数据报文匹配的包检测规则时,若确定所述业务数据报文包含的目的地址和源地址属于同一虚拟网络组,则认为发生异常,用户面功能网元不转发所述业务数据报文,能够防止UPF和数据网络之间由于报文的重复相互转发导致的环路问题。In this method, the session management function network element issues a data packet forwarding policy to the user plane function network element, so that the user plane function network element processes the received data packet based on the policy, wherein, according to the policy When the packet inspection rule matching the received service data packet is not matched, if it is determined that the destination address and source address contained in the service data packet belong to the same virtual network group, it is considered that an abnormality has occurred, and the user plane function network element does not work. Forwarding the service data message can prevent the loop problem between the UPF and the data network due to the repeated forwarding of messages.
在一种可能的设计中,所述组标识包括如下至少一项:外部组标识;内部组标识;网络侧分配的组标识;AAA服务器分配的组标识。In a possible design, the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
在该方法中,会话管理功能网元能够采用多种类型的组标识进行虚拟网络组的识别和标记等,灵活性较高。In this method, the network element of the session management function can use various types of group identifiers to identify and mark the virtual network group, and has high flexibility.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,应用于策略控制功能网元,所述方法包括:接收应用功能网元或能力开放功能网元或统一数据仓库网元下发的虚拟网络组配置信息,其中,所述虚拟网络组配置信息包含至少一个虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,所述至少一个虚拟网络组为网络侧针对终端设备发起的目标业务配置,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;根据所述虚拟网络组配置信息,生成至少一个用户路由选择策略,并将所述至少一个用户路由选择策略下发至所述终端设备。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is applied to a policy control function network element. The method includes: receiving a virtual network group issued by an application function network element, a capability opening function network element, or a unified data warehouse network element. configuration information, wherein the virtual network group configuration information includes configuration information corresponding to at least one virtual network group, the at least one virtual network group is the target service configuration initiated by the network side for the terminal device, and the at least one virtual network group Each virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, and the terminal equipment managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network; According to the virtual network group configuration information, at least one user routing policy is generated , and deliver the at least one user routing policy to the terminal device.
在该方法中,网络侧针对终端业务配置有至少一个虚拟网络组,能够支持终端设备根 据发起业务的业务信息灵活选择接入的目标虚拟网络组,同时网络侧的策略控制功能网元根据所述至少一个虚拟网络组的虚拟网络组配置信息为终端设备生成用户路由选择策略,进而使终端设备能通过用户路由选择策略匹配的方式,在至少一个虚拟网络组中确定要接入的目标虚拟网络组;同时能够适应一个数据网络对应多个虚拟网络组的组网场景。In this method, the network side is configured with at least one virtual network group for the terminal service, which can support the terminal device to flexibly select the target virtual network group to access according to the service information of the initiating service. The virtual network group configuration information of the at least one virtual network group generates a user routing policy for the terminal device, so that the terminal device can determine the target virtual network group to be accessed in the at least one virtual network group by matching the user routing policy ; At the same time, it can adapt to the networking scenario where one data network corresponds to multiple virtual network groups.
在一种可能的设计中,所述用户路由选择策略包含业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的组标识,所述业务信息为所述目标业务的业务信息。In a possible design, the user routing policy includes service information and a group identifier of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information, and the service information is service information of the target service.
在该方法中,策略控制功能网元下发给终端设备的用户路由选择策略包含业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的组标识,则终端设备能够根据业务信息匹配到的用户路由选择策略中包含的组标识,选择目标虚拟网络组,并可以根据选择的目标虚拟网络组的组标识,向网络侧指定接入所述目标虚拟网络组。In this method, the user routing policy issued by the policy control function network element to the terminal device includes service information and a group identifier of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information, and the terminal device can match the service information according to the service information. The user selects the target virtual network group according to the group identifier included in the routing policy, and can specify access to the target virtual network group to the network side according to the group identifier of the selected target virtual network group.
在一种可能的设计中,所述配置信息至少包含所述业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的可服务区域信息;所述用户路由选择策略还包含与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的可服务区域信息;其中,所述可服务区域信息用于指示虚拟网络组可服务的地理区域范围。In a possible design, the configuration information includes at least the service information and serviceable area information of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information; the user routing policy also includes information related to the service information The serviceable area information of the corresponding at least one virtual network group; wherein the serviceable area information is used to indicate the range of the geographical area that the virtual network group can serve.
在该方法中,策略控制功能网元获取的虚拟网络组的配置信息包括该虚拟网络组对应的可服务区域信息,并在下发给终端设备的用户路由选择策略中携带虚拟网络组对应的可服务区域信息,能够使终端设备结合自身所述位置及虚拟网络组的可服务区域信息,确定能为自身提供服务的虚拟网络组,继而进一步选择要接入的虚拟网络组。In this method, the configuration information of the virtual network group obtained by the network element of the policy control function includes the serviceable area information corresponding to the virtual network group, and the user routing policy delivered to the terminal device carries the serviceable area information corresponding to the virtual network group. The area information enables the terminal device to determine the virtual network group that can provide services for itself based on its own location and the serviceable area information of the virtual network group, and then further select the virtual network group to be accessed.
在一种可能的设计中,所述组标识包括如下至少一项:外部组标识;内部组标识;网络侧分配的组标识;AAA服务器分配的组标识。In a possible design, the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
在该方法中,策略控制功能网元能够采用多种类型的组标识进行虚拟网络组的识别和标记等,灵活性较高。In this method, the network element of the policy control function can use various types of group identifiers to identify and mark the virtual network group, and has high flexibility.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,包括处理单元;所述处理单元用于在发起目标业务时,根据所述目标业务的业务信息,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组;其中,所述至少一个虚拟网络组为网络侧针对所述目标业务配置,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;所述处理单元还用于确定所述目标业务在所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话,并通过所述目标会话进行数据传输。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a processing unit; the processing unit is configured to select a target virtual network in at least one virtual network group according to service information of the target service when initiating a target service group; wherein, the at least one virtual network group is configured by the network side for the target service, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, any virtual network group The terminal equipment managed by the network group can form a virtual local area network; the processing unit is further configured to determine the target session of the target service in the target virtual network group, and perform data transmission through the target session.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元根据所述目标业务的业务信息,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组时,具体用于:在至少一个用户路由选择策略中,选择与所述业务信息匹配的目标用户路由选择策略,其中,所述目标用户路由选择策略包含所述业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个可用虚拟网络组的组标识;在所述至少一个虚拟网络组中,选择包含在所述至少一个可用虚拟网络组中的所述目标虚拟网络组。In a possible design, when the processing unit selects the target virtual network group in at least one virtual network group according to the service information of the target service, the processing unit is specifically configured to: in at least one user routing selection policy, select the The target user routing policy matched by the service information, wherein the target user routing policy includes the service information and the group identifier of at least one available virtual network group corresponding to the service information; In a network group, the target virtual network group included in the at least one available virtual network group is selected.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元确定所述目标业务在所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话时,具体用于:在已建立的会话中,选择与所述目标用户路由选择策略匹配的所述目标会话;或者,向会话管理功能网元发送会话创建请求,所述会话创建请求用于请求创建所述目标会话,其中,所述会话创建请求携带所述目标虚拟网络组的组标识。In a possible design, when the processing unit determines the target session of the target service in the target virtual network group, the processing unit is specifically configured to: in the established session, select a routing strategy with the target user the matching target session; or, sending a session creation request to a session management function network element, where the session creation request is used to request creation of the target session, wherein the session creation request carries the group of the target virtual network group logo.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置还包括收发单元,所述处理单元在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组之前,所述收发单元还用于:在所述终端设备注册入网的流程中,接收接入与移动性管理功能网元下发的可服务虚拟网络组列表;或者,在所述终端 设备配置更新的流程中,接收所述接入与移动性管理功能网元下发的可服务虚拟网络组列表;其中,所述可服务虚拟网络组列表包含所述目标虚拟网络组。In a possible design, the communication apparatus further includes a transceiver unit, and before the processing unit selects a target virtual network group in at least one virtual network group, the transceiver unit is further configured to: register the terminal device to access the network In the process of receiving the serviceable virtual network group list issued by the access and mobility management function network element; or, in the process of updating the configuration of the terminal equipment, receiving the access and mobility management function network element. The sent serviceable virtual network group list; wherein, the serviceable virtual network group list includes the target virtual network group.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组之前,所述收发单元还用于:接收策略控制功能网元下发的所述至少一个用户路由选择策略。In a possible design, before the processing unit selects the target virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group, the transceiver unit is further configured to: receive the at least one user routing selection delivered by the policy control function network element Strategy.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元通过所述目标会话进行数据传输,包括:通过所述目标会话,与目标数据网络、所述目标虚拟网络组中的其它终端设备或其它虚拟网络组中的终端设备进行数据传输,所述其它虚拟网络组为除所述目标虚拟网络组以外的虚拟网络组。In a possible design, the processing unit performs data transmission through the target session, including: communicating with the target data network, other terminal devices in the target virtual network group, or other virtual network groups through the target session The terminal equipment in the device performs data transmission, and the other virtual network groups are virtual network groups other than the target virtual network group.
在一种可能的设计中,所述组标识包括如下至少一项:外部组标识;内部组标识;网络侧分配的组标识;AAA服务器分配的组标识。In a possible design, the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
在一种可能的设计中,所述配置信息还包含如下至少一项:数据网络名称;单网络切片选择辅助信息;会话类型;应用描述符;二次鉴权/授权信息;是否默认组指示信息;地址信息;其中,所述数据网络名称用于指示所述虚拟网络组支持接入的数据网络;所述单网络切片选择辅助信息用于指示所述虚拟网络组采用的网络切片;所述会话类型用于指示所述虚拟网络组中会话的类型;所述应用描述符用于指示所述目标业务所属应用的信息;所述二次鉴权/授权信息用于进行二次鉴权/授权;所述默认组指示信息用于指示虚拟网络组是否为设定的默认虚拟网络组;所述可服务区域信息用于指示虚拟网络组可服务的地理区域范围;所述地址信息用于指示虚拟网络组包含的至少一个待分配给终端设备的地址。In a possible design, the configuration information further includes at least one of the following: data network name; single network slice selection auxiliary information; session type; application descriptor; secondary authentication/authorization information; ; address information; wherein, the data network name is used to indicate the data network that the virtual network group supports access to; the single network slice selection auxiliary information is used to indicate the network slice adopted by the virtual network group; the session The type is used to indicate the type of the session in the virtual network group; the application descriptor is used to indicate the information of the application to which the target service belongs; the secondary authentication/authorization information is used to perform secondary authentication/authorization; The default group indication information is used to indicate whether the virtual network group is a set default virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the geographic area range that the virtual network group can serve; the address information is used to indicate the virtual network The group contains at least one address to be assigned to the end device.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,包括处理单元;所述处理单元用于根据来自终端设备的会话创建请求,确定目标虚拟网络组,其中,所述会话创建请求为所述终端设备在发起目标业务时发送的请求,所述目标虚拟网络组包含在网络侧针对所述目标业务配置的至少一个虚拟网络组中,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;所述处理单元还用于建立所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话,所述目标会话用于所述终端设备进行数据传输。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, including a processing unit; the processing unit is configured to determine a target virtual network group according to a session creation request from a terminal device, wherein the session creation request is for the terminal A request sent by a device when initiating a target service, the target virtual network group is included in at least one virtual network group configured on the network side for the target service, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage For the terminal devices accessing the virtual network group, any terminal device managed by the virtual network group can form a virtual local area network; the processing unit is further configured to establish a target session in the target virtual network group, and the target session is used for The terminal equipment performs data transmission.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置还包括收发单元,所述处理单元在确定目标虚拟网络组之前,所述收发单元还用于:接收来自统一数据管理功能网元的虚拟网络组配置信息;所述虚拟网络组配置信息包含至少一个虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,所述至少一个虚拟网络组包含所述目标虚拟网络组,所述配置信息包含如下至少一项:默认组指示信息;可服务区域信息;地址信息;其中,所述默认组指示信息用于指示虚拟网络组是否为设定的默认虚拟网络组;所述可服务区域信息用于指示虚拟网络组可服务的地理区域范围;所述地址信息用于指示虚拟网络组包含的至少一个待分配给终端设备的地址。In a possible design, the communication device further includes a transceiver unit, and before the processing unit determines the target virtual network group, the transceiver unit is further configured to: receive the virtual network group configuration from the unified data management function network element information; the virtual network group configuration information includes configuration information corresponding to at least one virtual network group, the at least one virtual network group includes the target virtual network group, and the configuration information includes at least one of the following: default group indication information ; serviceable area information; address information; wherein, the default group indication information is used to indicate whether the virtual network group is a set default virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the geographical area that the virtual network group can serve range; the address information is used to indicate at least one address to be allocated to the terminal device contained in the virtual network group.
在一种可能的设计中,所述会话创建请求携带虚拟网络组的组标识,所述处理单元确定目标虚拟网络组时,具体用于:确定所述组标识所对应的虚拟网络组为所述目标虚拟网络组。In a possible design, the session creation request carries the group identifier of the virtual network group, and when determining the target virtual network group, the processing unit is specifically configured to: determine that the virtual network group corresponding to the group identifier is the The target virtual network group.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元根据来自终端设备的会话创建请求,确定目标虚拟网络组时,具体用于:若所述会话创建请求未携带虚拟网络组的组标识,则根据所述虚拟网络组配置信息,将设定的默认虚拟网络组确定为所述目标虚拟网络组。In a possible design, when determining the target virtual network group according to the session creation request from the terminal device, the processing unit is specifically configured to: if the session creation request does not carry the group identifier of the virtual network group, according to the The configuration information of the virtual network group is determined, and the set default virtual network group is determined as the target virtual network group.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元与所述收发单元协作,还用于:根据所述目标虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,为所述终端设备分配地址;或者,将所述目标虚拟网络组的 组标识发送到AAA服务器,以使所述AAA服务器根据所述组标识,确定所述目标虚拟网络组,及根据所述目标虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,为所述终端设备分配地址;其中,所述配置信息包含所述地址信息。In a possible design, the processing unit cooperates with the transceiver unit, and is further configured to: assign an address to the terminal device according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group; The group identifier of the virtual network group is sent to the AAA server, so that the AAA server determines the target virtual network group according to the group identifier, and configures the terminal device according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group. Allocating an address; wherein, the configuration information includes the address information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述收发单元还用于:向用户面功能网元下发数据报文转发策略,以使所述用户面功能网元根据所述数据报文转发策略,对接收到的业务数据报文进行转发;其中,所述数据报文转发策略包括:判断在至少一个包检测规则中是否存在与所述业务数据报文匹配的包检测规则,若是,则根据所述包检测规则转发所述业务数据报文,否则,判断所述业务数据报文包含的目的地址和源地址是否属于同一虚拟网络组;若确定所述目的地址和源地址属于同一虚拟网络组,则不转发所述业务数据报文,若确定所述目的地址和源地址不属于同一虚拟网络组,则根据设定包检测规则转发所述业务数据报文;其中,所述包检测规则用于指示对业务数据报文采用的转发方式。In a possible design, the transceiver unit is further configured to: deliver a data packet forwarding policy to the user plane functional network element, so that the user plane functional network element can forward the receiving The received service data message is forwarded; wherein, the data message forwarding strategy includes: judging whether there is a packet inspection rule matching the service data message in at least one packet inspection rule, and if so, according to the packet inspection rule. The detection rule forwards the service data message, otherwise, it is judged whether the destination address and the source address contained in the service data message belong to the same virtual network group; if it is determined that the destination address and the source address belong to the same virtual network group, no Forward the service data message, if it is determined that the destination address and the source address do not belong to the same virtual network group, forward the service data message according to the set packet inspection rule; Forwarding mode used for service data packets.
在一种可能的设计中,所述组标识包括如下至少一项:外部组标识;内部组标识;网络侧分配的组标识;AAA服务器分配的组标识。In a possible design, the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,包括收发单元和处理单元;In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including a transceiver unit and a processing unit;
所述收发单元用于接收应用功能网元或能力开放功能网元或统一数据仓库网元下发的虚拟网络组配置信息,其中,所述虚拟网络组配置信息包含至少一个虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,所述至少一个虚拟网络组为网络侧针对终端设备发起的目标业务配置,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;所述处理单元与所述收发单元协作,用于根据所述虚拟网络组配置信息,生成至少一个用户路由选择策略,并将所述至少一个用户路由选择策略下发至所述终端设备。The transceiver unit is configured to receive the virtual network group configuration information issued by the application function network element, the capability opening function network element or the unified data warehouse network element, wherein the virtual network group configuration information includes at least one virtual network group corresponding. Configuration information, the at least one virtual network group is the target service configuration initiated by the network side for the terminal device, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, any one The terminal equipment managed by the virtual network group can form a virtual local area network; the processing unit cooperates with the transceiver unit to generate at least one user routing policy according to the virtual network group configuration information, and send the at least one user The routing policy is delivered to the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,所述用户路由选择策略包含业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的组标识,所述业务信息为所述目标业务的业务信息。In a possible design, the user routing policy includes service information and a group identifier of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information, and the service information is service information of the target service.
在一种可能的设计中,所述配置信息至少包含所述业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的可服务区域信息;所述用户路由选择策略还包含与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的可服务区域信息;其中,所述可服务区域信息用于指示虚拟网络组可服务的地理区域范围。In a possible design, the configuration information at least includes the service information and serviceable area information of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information; the user routing policy also includes the service information The serviceable area information of the corresponding at least one virtual network group; wherein the serviceable area information is used to indicate the range of the geographical area that the virtual network group can serve.
在一种可能的设计中,所述组标识包括如下至少一项:外部组标识;内部组标识;网络侧分配的组标识;AAA服务器分配的组标识。In a possible design, the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信装置,包括:至少一个处理器;以及与所述至少一个处理器通信连接的存储器、通信接口;其中,所述通信接口用于接收来自所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至所述处理器或将来自所述处理器的信号发送给所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置;所述存储器存储有可被所述至少一个处理器执行的指令,所述至少一个处理器通过执行所述存储器存储的指令,使得所述通信装置执行上述任一方面或任一方面中的任一种方法。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: at least one processor; and a memory and a communication interface communicatively connected to the at least one processor; wherein the communication interface is configured to receive data from the communication communication means other than the device and transmit to the processor or send signals from the processor to other communication means other than the communication device; the memory stores data that can be processed by the at least one The at least one processor executes the instructions stored in the memory to cause the communication apparatus to perform any one of the above aspects or any one of the methods of any one of the aspects.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供一种通信系统,所述通信系统包括终端设备、会话管理功能网元及策略控制功能网元;其中,所述终端设备用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面中的任一种方法;所述会话管理功能网元用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面中的任一种方法;所述策略控制功能网元用于执行上述第三方面或第三方面中的任一种方法。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, where the communication system includes a terminal device, a network element with a session management function, and a network element with a policy control function; wherein the terminal device is configured to execute the first aspect or the first any one of the methods in the aspect; the session management function network element is used to execute any one of the above second aspect or the second aspect method; the policy control function network element is used to execute the above third aspect or the third aspect any method in the aspect.
第九方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有 计算机程序或指令,当所述计算机程序或指令在通信装置上运行时,使得通信装置执行上述各个方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法。In a ninth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, where computer programs or instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer programs or instructions are run on a communication device, the communication device is made to execute each of the above any possible design method of the aspect.
第十方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或指令,当通信装置读取并执行所述计算机程序产品时,使得通信装置执行上述各个方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法。In a tenth aspect, the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program or instructions, when a communication device reads and executes the computer program product, the communication device is made to perform any one of the above aspects. method in the design.
第十一方面,本申请提供一种芯片,所述芯片包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,用于读取并执行所述存储器中存储的软件程序,以实现上述各个方面的任一种可能的设计中的方法。In an eleventh aspect, the present application provides a chip, the chip includes a processor, and the processor is coupled to a memory for reading and executing a software program stored in the memory, so as to implement any one of the above aspects method in a possible design.
上述第四方面至第十一方面中任一方面可以达到的技术效果可以参照上述第一方面至第三方面中有益效果的描述,此处不再重复赘述。For the technical effects that can be achieved in any one of the fourth aspect to the eleventh aspect, reference may be made to the description of the beneficial effects in the first aspect to the third aspect, which will not be repeated here.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1为一种5G组网架构示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a 5G networking architecture;
图2为一种UPF对数据报文对应的数据包进行处理的示意图;Fig. 2 is a kind of schematic diagram of processing the data packet corresponding to the data message by a kind of UPF;
图3为一种UPF对数据报文进行转发处理的示意图;Fig. 3 is a kind of schematic diagram that UPF performs forwarding processing on data message;
图4a为一种5G VN组中终端设备的数据在PSA UPF本地交换场景的用户面架构示意图;Figure 4a is a schematic diagram of the user plane architecture of a 5G VN group where the data of the terminal equipment is locally exchanged in the PSA UPF;
图4b为一种5G VN组中终端设备的数据跨PSA UPF交换场景的用户面架构示意图;Figure 4b is a schematic diagram of the user plane architecture of the data cross-PSA UPF exchange scenario of the terminal equipment in the 5G VN group;
图5为本申请实施例提供的通信方法适用的一种通信系统的架构示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system to which the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is applicable;
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种AF配置管理5G VN组的方法示意图;6 is a schematic diagram of a method for AF configuration management of a 5G VN group provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种网络侧在终端设备注册入网流程中下发可服务VN组列表的流程示意图;FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a network side delivering a serviceable VN group list in a terminal device registration and network access process according to an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种网络侧在终端配置更新流程中下发可服务VN组列表的流程示意图;8 is a schematic flowchart of a network side delivering a serviceable VN group list in a terminal configuration update process provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种PDU会话创建流程的示意图;10 is a schematic diagram of a PDU session creation process provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11为5G LAN场景中UPF对数据报文进行转发的示意图;Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of UPF forwarding data packets in a 5G LAN scenario;
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种UPF的报文转发策略示意图;FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a message forwarding strategy of a UPF provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a communication apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图,对本申请实施例进行详细描述。The embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
其中,方法和设备是基于同一技术构思的,由于方法及设备解决问题的原理相似,因此设备与方法的实施可以相互参见,重复之处不再赘述。The method and the device are based on the same technical concept. Since the principles of the method and the device for solving problems are similar, the implementation of the device and the method can be referred to each other, and repeated descriptions will not be repeated.
以下,对本申请中的部分用语进行解释说明,以便本领域技术人员理解。Hereinafter, some terms in the present application will be explained so as to be understood by those skilled in the art.
1)、终端设备:本申请实施例中所涉及的终端设备,又可以称为用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)等,是用户侧的一种用于接收或发射信号的实体,用于向网络侧设备发送上行信号,或从网络侧设备接收下行信号。终端设备包括向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备。1) Terminal equipment: The terminal equipment involved in the embodiments of this application may also be referred to as user equipment (user equipment, UE), mobile station (mobile station, MS), mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT), etc. An entity on the user side for receiving or transmitting signals, used for sending uplink signals to network side equipment, or receiving downlink signals from network side equipment. Terminal devices include devices that provide voice and/or data connectivity to users.
例如,终端设备可以为具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该终端设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)与核心网进行通信,与RAN交换语音和/或数据。该终端设备可以包括用户设备、车到外界通信(vehicle to X,V2X)终端设备、无线终端设备、移动终端设备、设备到设备通信(device-to-device,D2D)终端设备、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications,M2M/MTC)终端设备、物联网(internet of things,IoT)终端设备、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station),移动站(mobile station)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point,AP)、远程终端(remote terminal)、接入终端(access terminal)、用户终端(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、或用户装备(user device)、可穿戴设备、车载设备等。For example, the terminal device may be a handheld device with wireless connectivity, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem. The terminal equipment may communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), and exchange voice and/or data with the RAN. The terminal equipment may include user equipment, vehicle to X (V2X) terminal equipment, wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device (D2D) terminal equipment, machine-to-machine/ Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, Internet of things (IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit (subscriber unit), subscriber station (subscriber station), mobile station (mobile station), remote station (remote station), access point (access point, AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user agent (user agent) , or user device, wearable device, in-vehicle device, etc.
作为示例而非限定,在本申请实施例中,该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备或智能穿戴式设备等,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能头盔、智能首饰等。As an example and not a limitation, in this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also be a wearable device. Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc. It is a general term for the application of wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes. Wait. A wearable device is a portable device that is worn directly on the body or integrated into the user's clothing or accessories. Wearable device is not only a hardware device, but also realizes powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. In a broad sense, wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-scale, complete or partial functions without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, which needs to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones. Use, such as all kinds of smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring.
而如上介绍的各种终端设备,如果位于车辆上(例如放置在车辆内或安装在车辆内),都可以认为是车载终端设备,车载终端设备例如也称为车载单元(on-board unit,OBU)。The various terminal devices described above, if they are located on the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), can be considered as on-board terminal equipment. For example, the on-board terminal equipment is also called on-board unit (OBU). ).
2)、通信系统:用于在终端设备请求业务时,采用第三代合作伙伴计划(the 3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)接入技术将终端设备接入数据网络,并实现终端设备和数据网络之间数据的传输以实现相应的业务。2) Communication system: when the terminal equipment requests services, the 3rd generation partnership project (3GPP) access technology is used to connect the terminal equipment to the data network, and realize the connection between the terminal equipment and the data network. Data transmission between the two to achieve the corresponding business.
其中,通信系统分为接入网(access network,AN)和核心网(core network,CN)。接入网用于通过3GPP接入技术将终端设备汇接到核心网中。核心网用于将终端设备接入到不同的数据网络。另外,按照逻辑功能划分,核心网又可以分为控制面(信令面)和用户面(数据面)。Among them, the communication system is divided into an access network (AN) and a core network (core network, CN). The access network is used to converge terminal equipment into the core network through 3GPP access technology. The core network is used to connect terminal devices to different data networks. In addition, according to the division of logical functions, the core network can be further divided into a control plane (signaling plane) and a user plane (data plane).
还需说明的是,本申请提供的通信方法适用的通信系统包括第五代(5th generation,5G)通信系统(即新空口(new radio,NR)通信系统)、未来的新一代通信系统等。It should also be noted that the communication system to which the communication method provided in this application is applicable includes a fifth generation (5th generation, 5G) communication system (ie, a new radio (NR) communication system), a future new generation communication system, and the like.
又例如,在5G通信系统中,接入网还可以称为5G无线接入网(NG-无线接入网(radio access network,RAN),即NG-RAN),核心网还可以称为5G核心网(5G Core,5GC)。For another example, in a 5G communication system, the access network may also be referred to as a 5G radio access network (NG-radio access network (RAN), or NG-RAN), and the core network may also be referred to as a 5G core network (5G Core, 5GC).
3)、网络侧设备,为位于通信系统中的网元。所述网络侧设备可以为无线接入网中的接入网设备,或者为核心网中的核心网设备。本申请对此不作限定。3) The network side equipment is a network element located in the communication system. The network-side device may be an access network device in a wireless access network, or a core network device in a core network. This application does not limit this.
4)、接入网(access network,AN)设备:是网络侧的一种用于发射和/或接收信号的实体。作为通信系统中将终端设备接入到无线网络的设备,接入网设备包括以有线方式或无线方式接入通信系统的设备。其中,以无线方式接入通信系统的无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)设备,在NG-RAN中又可以称为基站,或者RAN节点,或者RAN设备。RAN设备还可以协调对空中接口的属性管理。4) Access network (access network, AN) equipment: an entity on the network side for transmitting and/or receiving signals. As a device for connecting a terminal device to a wireless network in a communication system, the access network device includes a device that accesses the communication system in a wired manner or wirelessly. Among them, a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) device that wirelessly accesses a communication system may also be called a base station, or a RAN node, or a RAN device in the NG-RAN. The RAN equipment may also coordinate attribute management of the air interface.
例如,RAN设备可以是新无线控制器(new radio controller,NR controller),可以是5G系统中的gNode B(gNB),可以是集中式网元(centralized unit),可以是新无线基站, 可以是射频拉远模块,可以是微基站(也称为小站),可以是中继(relay),可以是分布式网元(distributed unit),可以是各种形式的宏基站,可以是传输接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、传输测量功能(transmission measurement function,TMF)或传输点(transmission point,TP)或者任何其它无线接入设备,或者下一代通信中的基站,但本申请实施例不限于此。For example, the RAN device may be a new radio controller (NR controller), a gNode B (gNB) in a 5G system, a centralized unit (centralized unit), a new radio base station, or a The remote radio module can be a micro base station (also called a small cell), a relay, a distributed unit, a macro base station in various forms, or a transmission and reception point. (transmission reception point, TRP), transmission measurement function (transmission measurement function, TMF) or transmission point (transmission point, TP), or any other wireless access device, or a base station in next-generation communications, but the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
5)、核心网设备:是位于核心网中的网元,用于实现核心网的功能,例如负责根据终端设备通过接入网发送的呼叫请求或业务请求将所述终端设备接续到不同的数据网络上,以及负责计费、移动性管理、会话管理等业务。5), core network equipment: it is a network element located in the core network, which is used to realize the functions of the core network, for example, it is responsible for connecting the terminal equipment to different data according to the call request or service request sent by the terminal equipment through the access network. On the network, and responsible for billing, mobility management, session management and other services.
为便于理解,下面基于5G移动通信系统组网架构,对一些位于核心网中的网元进行简单介绍。For ease of understanding, the following briefly introduces some network elements located in the core network based on the networking architecture of the 5G mobile communication system.
图1为一种5G组网架构示意图。如图1所示,所述5G组网架构可以参考3GPP 23.501协议中定义的组网架构,该架构相关的功能网元的主要功能介绍如下:FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a 5G networking architecture. As shown in Figure 1, the 5G networking architecture can refer to the networking architecture defined in the 3GPP 23.501 protocol. The main functions of the functional network elements related to the architecture are introduced as follows:
应用功能(application function,AF)网元:也称为应用控制器(application controller),主要用于传递应用侧对网络侧的需求,例如服务质量(quality of service,QoS)需求、用户状态事件订阅等。AF网元可以是第三方应用的应用功能实体,也可以是运营商部署的应用服务,如IMS语音呼叫业务。其中,第三方应用的应用功能实体与核心网进行交互时可经由能力开放功能(network exposure function,NEF)网元进行授权处理,例如第三方应用的应用功能实体直接向NEF网元发送请求消息,NEF网元验证AF网元是否被允许发送该请求消息,若验证通过,则转发该请求消息至对应的策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)网元或统一数据管理功能(unified data management,UDM)网元。Application function (AF) network element: also known as application controller (application controller), which is mainly used to convey the requirements of the application side to the network side, such as quality of service (QoS) requirements, user status event subscription Wait. The AF network element may be an application function entity of a third-party application, or may be an application service deployed by an operator, such as an IMS voice call service. The application function entity of the third-party application can perform authorization processing through the network exposure function (NEF) network element when interacting with the core network. For example, the application function entity of the third-party application directly sends a request message to the NEF network element. The NEF network element verifies whether the AF network element is allowed to send the request message. If the verification passes, it forwards the request message to the corresponding policy control function (PCF) network element or unified data management function (UDM) ) network element.
PCF网元:主要用于实现针对会话、业务流级别进行计费、QoS带宽保障及移动性管理、用户设备策略决策等策略控制功能。PCF network element: It is mainly used to implement policy control functions such as charging for sessions and service flow levels, QoS bandwidth guarantee and mobility management, and user equipment policy decision-making.
UDM网元:主要用于实现管理签约数据、用户接入授权等数据管理功能。UDM network element: It is mainly used to implement data management functions such as managing subscription data and user access authorization.
接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元:主要用于实现对终端设备进行移动性管理、接入鉴权/授权等功能。此外,AMF网元还负责在终端设备与PCF网元间传递用户策略。Access and mobility management function (AMF) network element: It is mainly used to implement functions such as mobility management and access authentication/authorization for terminal equipment. In addition, the AMF network element is also responsible for transferring user policies between the terminal device and the PCF network element.
会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)网元:主要用于对终端设备进行分组数据单元(packet data unit,PDU)会话管理、PCF下发控制策略的执行、用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元的选择、PDU类型为IP类型时终端设备IP地址的分配等。Session management function (SMF) network element: It is mainly used for packet data unit (PDU) session management for terminal equipment, execution of control policies issued by PCF, and user plane function (UPF). ) selection of network elements, assignment of IP addresses of terminal equipment when the PDU type is IP type, etc.
UPF网元:主要用于作为终端设备和数据网络的接口,完成用户面数据转发、基于会话/流级的计费统计、带宽限制等功能。UPF network element: It is mainly used as the interface between terminal equipment and data network, and completes functions such as user plane data forwarding, session/flow-level accounting statistics, and bandwidth limitation.
统一数据仓库(unified data repository,UDR)网元:主要负责签约数据、策略数据、应用数据等类型的数据的存取功能,UDR网元可以与UDM网元、PCF网元、NEF网元等网元进行接口互联,以实现对应网元访问或调用。Unified data repository (UDR) network element: It is mainly responsible for the access function of data such as subscription data, policy data, and application data. Elements perform interface interconnection to realize access or invocation of corresponding network elements.
鉴权服务功能(authentication server function,AUSF)网元(图1中未示出):可用于支持3GPP框架定义的接入服务鉴权,同时也可以支持非3GPP接入网的鉴权。Authentication server function (authentication server function, AUSF) network element (not shown in Figure 1): can be used to support the access service authentication defined by the 3GPP framework, and can also support the authentication of non-3GPP access networks.
当然,核心网中也可以包括除以上示例说明的网元之外的其它网元,这里不再一一列举。Of course, the core network may also include other network elements other than the network elements described in the above examples, which will not be listed one by one here.
需要说明的是,本申请对实现各功能的对应网元的名称并不限定,其还可以实现其他 功能或与其他功能网元进行融合,并且还可以称为其他名称。It should be noted that this application does not limit the name of the corresponding network element that implements each function, and it can also implement other functions or be integrated with other functional network elements, and can also be called other names.
在图1所示的5G组网架构中,网元与网元、网元与设备间的一些相关通信接口的主要功能介绍如下:In the 5G networking architecture shown in Figure 1, the main functions of some related communication interfaces between network elements and network elements and between network elements and devices are described as follows:
N1接口:为AMF网元与终端设备之间的信令面接口,与接入网无关,用于核心网与终端设备之间交换信令消息,可用于终端设备注册入网、终端设备建立PDU会话、网络侧配置终端设备策略等流程中。N1 interface: It is the signaling plane interface between the AMF network element and the terminal device. It has nothing to do with the access network. It is used to exchange signaling messages between the core network and the terminal device. It can be used for the terminal device to register into the network and to establish a PDU session. , in the process of configuring terminal device policies on the network side.
N2接口:为AMF网元与RAN设备之间的接口,用于传递核心网至RAN设备的无线承载控制信息等。N2 interface: It is the interface between the AMF network element and the RAN device, and is used to transmit radio bearer control information from the core network to the RAN device.
N3接口:为(R)AN设备与UPF网元之间的接口,用于在RAN设备和UPF网元之间传递终端设备的业务数据。N3 interface: It is the interface between the (R)AN equipment and the UPF network element, used to transfer the service data of the terminal equipment between the RAN equipment and the UPF network element.
N4接口:为SMF网元与UPF网元之间的接口,用于传递控制面与用户面之间的信息,可用于控制面终端设备根据与运营商的签约信息完成入网操作等流程中。N4 interface: It is the interface between the SMF network element and the UPF network element. It is used to transmit the information between the control plane and the user plane. It can be used for the control plane terminal equipment to complete the network access operation according to the contract information with the operator.
N6接口:为UPF网元与DN之间的接口,用于在UPF网元和DN之间传递终端设备的业务数据。N6 interface: It is the interface between the UPF network element and the DN, and is used to transfer the service data of the terminal equipment between the UPF network element and the DN.
N7接口:为PCF网元与SMF网元之间的接口,用于下发PDU会话粒度以及业务数据流粒度控制策略等信息。N7 interface: It is the interface between the PCF network element and the SMF network element, and is used to deliver information such as PDU session granularity and service data flow granularity control policy.
N8接口:为AMF网元与UDM网元之间的接口,用于AMF网元从UDM网元获取接入与移动性管理相关签约数据与鉴权数据,以及AMF网元向UDM网元注册终端设备当前移动性管理相关信息等。N8 interface: It is the interface between the AMF network element and the UDM network element. It is used by the AMF network element to obtain the subscription data and authentication data related to access and mobility management from the UDM network element, and the AMF network element to register the terminal with the UDM network element. Information about the current mobility management of the device, etc.
N10接口:为SMF网元与UDM网元之间的接口,用于SMF网元从UDM网元获取会话管理相关签约数据,以及SMF网元向UDM网元注册终端设备当前会话相关信息等。N10 interface: It is the interface between the SMF network element and the UDM network element. It is used by the SMF network element to obtain the session management related subscription data from the UDM network element, and the SMF network element to register the current session related information of the terminal device to the UDM network element.
N11接口:为SMF网元与AMF网元之间的接口,用于传递RAN设备和UPF网元之间的PDU会话隧道信息、发送给终端设备的控制消息、发送给RAN设备的无线资源控制信息等。N11 interface: It is the interface between the SMF network element and the AMF network element, which is used to transfer the PDU session tunnel information between the RAN device and the UPF network element, the control message sent to the terminal device, and the radio resource control information sent to the RAN device. Wait.
6)、数据网络:用于提供数据传输服务的通信网络,具体可以是公用数据网(public data network,PDN),如因特网(internet)、网际互连协议(internet protocol,IP)多媒体系统(IP multi-media subsystem,IMS)语音呼叫业务等,还可以是运营商服务、互联网服务或者第三方服务等。数据网络的标识为数据网络名称(data network name,DNN)。终端设备中特定服务应用(application,APP)可以通过会话传递的方式与DN进行数据通信,其中会话可以是IP、以太网、非结构化等类型的会话。6), data network: a communication network used to provide data transmission services, specifically a public data network (PDN), such as the Internet (internet), internet protocol (internet protocol, IP) multimedia system (IP Multi-media subsystem, IMS) voice call service, etc., it can also be operator service, Internet service or third-party service, etc. The identification of the data network is the data network name (DNN). A specific service application (application, APP) in the terminal device may perform data communication with the DN by means of session transfer, where the session may be an IP, Ethernet, unstructured and other type of session.
7)、用户路由选择策略(UE route selection policy,URSP):URSP用于终端设备确定触发的应用业务是否能够采用终端设备已经建立的PDU会话或者新建立一个PDU会话。7) User routing policy (UE route selection policy, URSP): URSP is used by the terminal device to determine whether the triggered application service can adopt the PDU session already established by the terminal device or newly establish a PDU session.
5G通信系统中,PDU会话的建立是由终端设备基于发起的业务触发的,不同业务对PDU会话属性如网络切片(network slice)、DNN、会话服务连接性模式(session and service continuity mode,SSC mode)等有不同的需求,所以终端设备基于不同的业务可能会触发建立不同的PDU会话。因此,5G中引入了URSP,用于终端设备确定发起的业务是否能够采用一个已有的PDU会话进行数据传输,或者是否可以新建一个PDU会话来传输该业务的数据。In the 5G communication system, the establishment of the PDU session is triggered by the terminal device based on the service initiated. Different services have different attributes to the PDU session, such as network slice (network slice), DNN, session and service continuity mode (session and service continuity mode, SSC mode). ) and so on have different requirements, so the terminal device may trigger the establishment of different PDU sessions based on different services. Therefore, URSP is introduced in 5G for the terminal device to determine whether the initiated service can use an existing PDU session for data transmission, or whether a new PDU session can be used to transmit the data of the service.
终端设备根据发起的业务进行URSP匹配后,可以根据匹配到的URSP获取相应的PDU会话参数,如果有满足参数需求的PDU会话,则采用该PDU会话进行数据传输;如 果没有满足参数需求的PDU会话,则可以新建一个PDU会话来进行数据传输。After the terminal device performs URSP matching according to the initiated service, it can obtain the corresponding PDU session parameters according to the matched URSP. If there is a PDU session that meets the parameter requirements, the PDU session is used for data transmission; if there is no PDU session that meets the parameter requirements. , you can create a new PDU session for data transmission.
其中,URSP包含的参数信息如下表1所示:Among them, the parameter information contained in URSP is shown in Table 1 below:
表1 URSP参数信息Table 1 URSP parameter information
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000001
其中,上述URSP参数信息可以参考3GPP 23.503协议中表6.6.2.1-2关于URSP的描述。For the above URSP parameter information, reference may be made to the description of URSP in Table 6.6.2.1-2 in the 3GPP 23.503 protocol.
URSP主要包含业务流描述符(traffic descriptor)和路由选择描述符(route selection descriptors)两部分内容。URSP mainly includes two parts: traffic descriptor (traffic descriptor) and route selection descriptor (route selection descriptor).
其中,所述业务流描述符主要包含应用标识(app ID)、DNN、IP三元组(IP descriptor),域名描述符(domain descriptor)、连接能力(connection capabilities)等参数。Wherein, the service flow descriptor mainly includes parameters such as application ID (app ID), DNN, IP triplet (IP descriptor), domain descriptor (domain descriptor), connection capabilities (connection capabilities).
所述路由选择描述符包含的参数信息如下表2所示:The parameter information contained in the routing descriptor is shown in Table 2 below:
表2路由选择描述符参数信息Table 2 Routing Descriptor Parameter Information
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000002
其中,上述路由选择描述符包含的参数信息可以参考3GPP 23.503通信协议中表6.6.2.1-3关于路由选择描述符的描述。For the parameter information contained in the above routing descriptor, reference may be made to the description of the routing descriptor in Table 6.6.2.1-3 in the 3GPP 23.503 communication protocol.
8)、包检测规则(packet detection rule,PDR):在网络侧,SMF在对终端设备进行PDU会话管理过程中,通过N4接口与UPF进行信息交互,控制UPF创建、修改、删除PDU会话对应的终端(UE)N4会话(N4session),来实现对UPF处理数据报文的控制。具体的,SMF针对UPF内的终端N4会话下发各类数据包处理规则(如PDR和对应的转发动 作规则(forwarding action rule,FAR))来完成对UPF处理数据报文(或数据报文的数据包)的控制,UPF按照SMF下发的数据包处理规则对收到的外部业务数据报文进行相应处理。其中,PDR用于对数据报文(数据包)进行匹配,FAR用于指示报文转发方式。8) Packet detection rule (PDR): On the network side, in the process of managing PDU sessions for terminal devices, SMF exchanges information with UPF through the N4 interface, and controls UPF to create, modify, and delete corresponding PDU sessions. A terminal (UE) N4 session (N4 session) is used to control the processing of data packets by the UPF. Specifically, the SMF issues various data packet processing rules (such as PDR and corresponding forwarding action rules (FAR)) to the terminal N4 session in the UPF to complete the processing of data packets (or data packets by the UPF). Data packets), the UPF processes the received external service data packets according to the data packet processing rules issued by the SMF. The PDR is used to match data packets (data packets), and the FAR is used to indicate the packet forwarding mode.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,N4会话也称为包转发控制协议(packet forwarding control protocol,PFCP)会话。It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the present application, the N4 session is also referred to as a packet forwarding control protocol (packet forwarding control protocol, PFCP) session.
PDR由SMF在进行PDU会话管理过程中下发给UPF,UPF根据SMF下发的PDR执行对应的数据包匹配,并由此获得对应的FAR完成包转发。一个PDR内包含一个包检测信息(packet detection information,PDI)参数,一个PDI参数包含一个或若干个匹配字段,用于与UPF收到的数据报文进行匹配来识别数据报文,并完成数据报文与终端N4会话的关联。The PDR is delivered to the UPF by the SMF during the PDU session management process, and the UPF performs the corresponding data packet matching according to the PDR delivered by the SMF, and thus obtains the corresponding FAR to complete packet forwarding. A PDR contains a packet detection information (PDI) parameter, and a PDI parameter contains one or several matching fields, which are used to match the data packets received by the UPF to identify the data packets and complete the data packets. The association of the text with the terminal N4 session.
其中,SMF向UPF提供的PDR包含的信息主要如下表3所示:Among them, the information contained in the PDR provided by SMF to UPF is mainly shown in Table 3 below:
表3 PFCP会话建立请求中的PDR参数列表Table 3 List of PDR parameters in the PFCP session establishment request
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000005
上述表3所示的内容可以参照3GPP 29.244通信协议中表7.5.2.2-1所描述的PDR参数信息。For the content shown in Table 3 above, refer to the PDR parameter information described in Table 7.5.2.2-1 in the 3GPP 29.244 communication protocol.
PDR中的PDI包含的信息主要如下表4所示:The information contained in the PDI in the PDR is mainly shown in Table 4 below:
表4 PFCP会话建立请求中的PDI参数列表Table 4 List of PDI parameters in the PFCP session establishment request
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000009
上述表4所示的参数内容可参照3GPP 29.244通信协议中表7.5.2.2-2所描述的PDI参数信息。For the parameter content shown in Table 4 above, refer to the PDI parameter information described in Table 7.5.2.2-2 in the 3GPP 29.244 communication protocol.
其中,PDI主要包括如下信息:Among them, PDI mainly includes the following information:
a.数据报文入口/源端口(source interface)。a. Datagram entry/source interface.
b.对入口报文进行匹配的一系列参数。例如:隧道端点标识(tunnel endpoint identity document,TEID)/全量隧道端点标识(full qualified TEID,F-TEID)、网络实例(network  instance)、终端设备IP地址、业务数据流(service data flow filter,SDF)过滤器(filter(s))、应用ID(application ID)等参数。b. A series of parameters for matching ingress packets. For example: tunnel endpoint identity document (TEID)/full qualified TEID (F-TEID), network instance, IP address of terminal device, service data flow filter (SDF) ) filter (filter(s)), application ID (application ID) and other parameters.
UPF从SMF获取PDR后,在接收到一个数据报文时,将该数据报文的报文头各字段与PDR中PDI定义的参数项进行匹配,找到该数据报文归属的N4会话以及N4会话内与该数据报文具有最高优先级匹配关系的PDR规则完成报文匹配。UPF完成PDR匹配后,匹配到的PDR规则中包含相应的FAR指示,UPF将根据对应的FAR指示完成对数据报文的转发。After the UPF obtains the PDR from the SMF, when it receives a data packet, it matches the fields of the packet header of the data packet with the parameters defined by the PDI in the PDR, and finds the N4 session and N4 session to which the data packet belongs. The PDR rule with the highest priority matching relationship with the data packet completes the packet matching. After the UPF completes the PDR matching, the matched PDR rule contains the corresponding FAR indication, and the UPF will complete the forwarding of the data packet according to the corresponding FAR indication.
FAR包含的信息主要如下表5所示:The information contained in the FAR is mainly shown in Table 5 below:
表5 PFCP会话建立请求中的FAR参数列表Table 5 List of FAR parameters in the PFCP session establishment request
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000011
上述表5所示的参数内容可以参照3GPP 29.244通信协议中表7.5.2.2-3所描述的FAR参数信息。For the parameter content shown in Table 5 above, refer to the FAR parameter information described in Table 7.5.2.2-3 in the 3GPP 29.244 communication protocol.
其中,FAR主要通过如下信息指示UPF进行数据报文处理:Among them, FAR mainly instructs UPF to process data packets through the following information:
a.应用动作参数(apply action parameter):该参数用于指示UPF是否需要对数据报文进行转发、缓存、复制、丢弃处理,或者以通知或不通知控制面(如SMF)的方式缓存下行数据报文;或者用于指示UPF是否允许终端设备加入IP组播组。a. Apply action parameter: This parameter is used to indicate whether UPF needs to forward, cache, copy, discard data packets, or buffer downlink data with or without notification to the control plane (such as SMF). message; or used to indicate whether UPF allows the terminal device to join the IP multicast group.
b.转发、缓存、复制参数:当应用动作参数指示UPF对数据包进行转发、缓存或复制时,UPF需要使用这些参数,以便根据这些参数对数据报文进行相应处理。b. Forwarding, buffering, and copying parameters: when the application action parameter instructs the UPF to forward, cache, or copy the data packet, the UPF needs to use these parameters so that the data packet can be processed accordingly according to these parameters.
示例性的,图2为UPF对数据报文对应的数据包进行处理的示意图。如图2所示,外部数据报文进入UPF后,UPF根据PDR匹配条件匹配N4会话(N4session/PFCP session)信息,然后在N4会话中匹配优先级最高的PDR,再根据其对应的FAR完成数据包转发。Exemplarily, FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of processing a data packet corresponding to a data packet by the UPF. As shown in Figure 2, after the external data packet enters the UPF, the UPF matches the N4 session (N4 session/PFCP session) information according to the PDR matching conditions, and then matches the PDR with the highest priority in the N4 session, and then completes the data according to its corresponding FAR. Packet forwarding.
示例性的,图3为UPF对数据报文进行转发处理的示意图。如图3所示,UPF对数据报文进行转发处理主要包括如下两个过程:Exemplarily, FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the UPF performing forwarding processing on a data packet. As shown in Figure 3, UPF's forwarding of data packets mainly includes the following two processes:
1)来自终端设备的上行数据报文通过接入网设备到达N3接口,UPF通过对所述上行数据报文匹配数据报文源端口、隧道标识等参数信息(其中,具体的匹配参数详见如上表3中所示的PDR参数信息)获得源终端N4会话,并根据业务数据流过滤器对所述源终端N4会话进行PDR匹配,确定相应的FAR,根据该FAR指示的转发规则转发数据报文。1) The upstream data message from the terminal device reaches the N3 interface through the access network device, and the UPF matches the upstream data message with parameter information such as the data message source port and the tunnel identifier (wherein, the specific matching parameters are detailed as above. The PDR parameter information shown in Table 3) obtains the source terminal N4 session, and performs PDR matching on the source terminal N4 session according to the service data flow filter, determines the corresponding FAR, and forwards the data packet according to the forwarding rule indicated by the FAR .
其中,上述图3中示例性示出的UPF对来自终端设备的上行数据报文进行的处理是:通过N6接口将该上行数据报文转发到数据网络侧。Wherein, the processing performed by the UPF exemplarily shown in FIG. 3 on the uplink data packet from the terminal device is: forwarding the uplink data packet to the data network side through the N6 interface.
2)来自数据网络的下行数据报文通过N6接口进入UPF,UPF通过匹配数据报文源端口、网络实例、目的IP地址等参数信息,获得所述下行数据报文匹配的目的终端N4会话及PDR规则,并确定相应的FAR,根据该FAR指示的转发规则转发数据报文。2) The downlink data message from the data network enters the UPF through the N6 interface, and the UPF obtains the destination terminal N4 session and PDR matched by the downlink data message by matching parameter information such as the data message source port, network instance, and destination IP address. rule, and determine the corresponding FAR, and forward the data packet according to the forwarding rule indicated by the FAR.
其中,上述图3中示例性示出的UPF对来自数据网络的下行数据报文进行的处理是:通过N3接口将该下行数据报文转发到终端设备。Wherein, the processing performed by the UPF exemplarily shown in FIG. 3 on the downlink data packet from the data network is: forwarding the downlink data packet to the terminal device through the N3 interface.
9)、虚拟网络组:3GPP 23.501通信协议中定义了5G LAN服务,能够在移动网络中为用户构建一个虚拟移动专网,终端设备通过建立传统的PDU连接能够与数据网络进行数据交换,5G LAN在此基础上引入了虚拟网络组(VN组)的概念。其中,一个5G VN组对应一个5G LAN,且可以包括多个终端设备,归属于同一个5G VN组的终端设备接入移动网络,既能与数据网络通信,也能与该5G VN组内的其它终端设备通信。当前,5G移动网络内可同时支持多个5G VN组,同一个5G VN组下的终端设备可通过相同或不同的PDU会话锚点(PDU session anchor,PSA)UPF相互通信,不同5G VN组之间的终端设备相互隔离。9) Virtual network group: The 5G LAN service is defined in the 3GPP 23.501 communication protocol, which can build a virtual mobile private network for users in the mobile network. The terminal device can exchange data with the data network by establishing a traditional PDU connection. 5G LAN On this basis, the concept of virtual network group (VN group) is introduced. Among them, a 5G VN group corresponds to a 5G LAN, and can include multiple terminal devices. The terminal devices belonging to the same 5G VN group access the mobile network and can communicate with the data network as well as with the 5G VN group. Communication with other terminal devices. Currently, multiple 5G VN groups can be supported in the 5G mobile network at the same time. Terminal devices under the same 5G VN group can communicate with each other through the same or different PDU session anchor (PSA) UPFs. Terminal devices between them are isolated from each other.
图4a为一种5G VN组中终端设备的数据在PSA UPF本地交换场景的用户面架构示意图。如图4a所示,同一个5G VN组下的多个终端设备(如UE1、UE2)注册在同一个PSA UPF网元,此场景下PSA UPF网元除为UE1、UE2完成与数据网络的数据交换之外,由于UE1与UE2归属于同一个5G VN组,PSA UPF网元还作为5G VN组的本地交换(local switch),完成UE1与UE2之间的数据交换。Figure 4a is a schematic diagram of the user plane architecture of a scenario where data of a terminal device in a 5G VN group is locally exchanged in a PSA UPF. As shown in Figure 4a, multiple terminal devices (such as UE1, UE2) under the same 5G VN group are registered in the same PSA UPF network element. In this scenario, the PSA UPF network element is divided into UE1 and UE2 to complete the data with the data network In addition to the exchange, since UE1 and UE2 belong to the same 5G VN group, the PSA UPF network element also acts as the local switch of the 5G VN group to complete the data exchange between UE1 and UE2.
图4b为一种5G VN组中终端设备的数据跨PSA UPF交换场景的用户面架构示意图。如图4b所示,同一个5G VN组下的多个终端设备(如UE1、UE2)注册在不同的PSA UPF网元,此场景下不同的PSA UPF网元之间增加了N19接口,归属于同一个5G VN组的UE1、UE2在进行数据交换时,将分别由其对应的PSA UPF网元通过N19接口通道完成数据传输和交互。Figure 4b is a schematic diagram of the user plane architecture of a scenario where terminal equipment in a 5G VN group exchanges data across PSA UPFs. As shown in Figure 4b, multiple terminal devices (such as UE1 and UE2) under the same 5G VN group are registered in different PSA UPF network elements. In this scenario, N19 interfaces are added between different PSA UPF network elements, which belong to When UE1 and UE2 of the same 5G VN group exchange data, their corresponding PSA UPF network elements will complete data transmission and interaction through the N19 interface channel respectively.
其中,图4a或图4b中,(R)AN设备与PSA UPF网元之间的中间UPF(Intermediate UPF,I-UPF)网元用于作为上行链路分类器(uplink classifier,UL-CL)将来自终端设备的数据流导向数据网络,或者作为分支点以支持多宿主PDU会话。Among them, in Figure 4a or Figure 4b, the intermediate UPF (Intermediate UPF, I-UPF) network element between the (R)AN device and the PSA UPF network element is used as an uplink classifier (uplink classifier, UL-CL) Directs data flow from end devices to the data network, or acts as a branch point to support multi-homed PDU sessions.
数据网络通常以数据网络名称(Data Network Name,DNN)为标识,在5G中引入VN组后,相关协议定义数据网络的DNN与5G VN组为1:1关系,即一个DNN对应一个5G VN组,也即一个数据网络对应一个5G VN组,因此5G VN组对应的5G LAN只能支持接入与该5G VN组对应的数据网络。The data network is usually identified by the data network name (DNN). After the VN group is introduced in 5G, the relevant protocol defines a 1:1 relationship between the DNN of the data network and the 5G VN group, that is, a DNN corresponds to a 5G VN group , that is, a data network corresponds to a 5G VN group, so the 5G LAN corresponding to the 5G VN group can only support access to the data network corresponding to the 5G VN group.
其中,DNN和5G VN组为1:1的组网关系可参考当前3GPP 23.501协议中的相关定义。Among them, the networking relationship in which the DNN and 5G VN groups are 1:1 can refer to the relevant definitions in the current 3GPP 23.501 protocol.
5G VN组可以由网络侧进行创建、配置和管理。其中,5G VN组的相关信息主要包括下列各项内容:5G VN groups can be created, configured and managed by the network side. Among them, the relevant information of the 5G VN group mainly includes the following contents:
A、VN组的标识(标识符):VN组的标识包括外部组标识(External Group ID)和内部组标识(Internal Group ID)。外部组标识由网络侧的AF定义,用于唯一标识一个VN组;内部组标识由网络侧的UDM定义,用于在网络侧内部唯一标识一个VN组。其中,外部组标识与内部组标识存在映射关系。AF在创建VN组时生成外部组标识,同时UDM自动生成该VN组的内部组标识并完成与外部组标识的映射。A. Identification (identifier) of the VN group: The identification of the VN group includes an external group identification (External Group ID) and an internal group identification (Internal Group ID). The external group identifier is defined by the AF on the network side and used to uniquely identify a VN group; the internal group identifier is defined by the UDM on the network side and used to uniquely identify a VN group inside the network side. There is a mapping relationship between the external group identifier and the internal group identifier. AF generates an external group ID when creating a VN group, and UDM automatically generates the internal group ID of the VN group and completes the mapping with the external group ID.
B、VN组成员关系:VN组的成员关系包括归属于同一个VN组的终端设备成员列表。每个成员即终端设备通过其标识信息唯一标识,其中,该标识信息可以为通用公共订阅标识(generic public subscription identifier,GPSI),该标识是由数据网络为终端设备提供的唯一用户标识。B. VN group membership: the membership of a VN group includes a list of terminal equipment members belonging to the same VN group. Each member, that is, a terminal device, is uniquely identified by its identification information, wherein the identification information may be a generic public subscription identifier (GPSI), which is a unique user identification provided by the data network for the terminal device.
VN组成员关系包含的参数如下表6中所示:The parameters included in the VN group membership are shown in Table 6 below:
表6 VN组成员管理参数Table 6 VN group member management parameters
参数parameter 描述describe
GPSI列表GPSI list VN组成员列表,其中,每个成员通过其GPSI标识A list of VN group members, where each member is identified by its GPSI
外部组标识External group ID VN组的标识ID of the VN group
C、VN组的配置信息(也可以称为VN组数据):VN组的配置信息包含若干属性字段,用于定义一个VN组的各个方面的参数。C. Configuration information of a VN group (also referred to as VN group data): The configuration information of a VN group includes several attribute fields, which are used to define parameters of various aspects of a VN group.
VN组的配置信息包含的参数如下表7中所示:The parameters included in the configuration information of the VN group are shown in Table 7 below:
表7 5G VN组配置信息Table 7 5G VN group configuration information
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000012
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000012
需要说明的是,在本申请中,“和/或”描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。本申请中所涉及的多个,是指两个或两个以上。至少一个,是指一个或一个以上,至少一个包括一个或多个。在本申请的文字描述中,字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。It should be noted that, in this application, "and/or" describes the association relationship between associated objects, which means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean that A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, There are three cases of B alone. The character "/" generally indicates that the associated objects are an "or" relationship. The plural referred to in this application refers to two or more. At least one refers to one or more than one, and at least one includes one or more. In the text description of this application, the character "/" generally indicates that the contextual objects are in an "or" relationship.
此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及他们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含,例如,包含了一系列步骤或模块。方法、系统、产品或设备不必限于清楚地列出的那些步骤或模块,而是可包括没有清楚地列出的或对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或模块。Furthermore, the terms "comprising" and "having", and any variations thereof, are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion, eg, comprising a series of steps or modules. A method, system, product or device is not necessarily limited to those steps or modules expressly listed, but may include other steps or modules not expressly listed or inherent to the process, method, product or device.
局域网是在一个局部的地理范围(如学校、工厂等)内,将各种计算机、外部设备和数据库等互相联接起来组成的计算机通信网。局域网可以通过数据通信网或专用数据电路,与远方的局域网、数据库或处理中心相连接,构成一个大范围的信息处理网络系统。A local area network is a computer communication network that connects various computers, external devices and databases within a local geographic range (such as schools, factories, etc.). The local area network can be connected with the remote local area network, database or processing center through the data communication network or special data circuit to form a large-scale information processing network system.
5G中的局域网称为5G LAN,是利用移动网络本身的广覆盖特点,来直接提供局域网服务的通信网络。5G LAN可以在更广泛的移动网络覆盖范围内使用,加入同一5G LAN的用户设备均可实现基于局域网的数据交换和通信。利用已经广覆盖的移动网络,5G LAN服务的创建及其伸缩、迁移、调整等均可由网络侧自动完成,无需人工干预。此外,5G LAN还可按需定制,且不同5G LAN之间互相安全隔离。The local area network in 5G is called 5G LAN, which is a communication network that directly provides local area network services by using the wide coverage characteristics of the mobile network itself. 5G LAN can be used in a wider range of mobile network coverage, and user equipment that joins the same 5G LAN can realize local area network-based data exchange and communication. Utilizing the already wide coverage of the mobile network, the creation of 5G LAN services and their scaling, migration, and adjustment can be done automatically by the network side without manual intervention. In addition, 5G LAN can also be customized on demand, and different 5G LANs are securely isolated from each other.
当前5G LAN网络通过NEF能力开放为用户提供了简单高效的5G VN组管理入口,能够支持用户对5G VN组进行创建、修改、删除等管理操作,未来可能会存在大量通过AF调用NEF对5G VN组进行的创建、修改、删除等管理操作。但是,如果采用上述现有的一个DNN对应一个5G VN组的网络部署方式,则用户每次对5G VN组进行增删修改操作时,5G LAN网络在进行相应操作的同时,需增删修改5G VN组对应的数据网络的DNN,而增删DNN将涉及到5G移动网络内部的配置以及5G网络和数据网络之间接口数据通道的配置。这样在用户每次对5G VN组进行操作时,均需要人工如移动运营商对5G VN组相关的DNN进行相应的操作,对网络侧来说就需要较大的人工干预,无法满足简单快捷 的管理5G VN组的需求,例如无法做到用户增删修改5G VN组而移动运营商无感知。The current 5G LAN network provides users with a simple and efficient 5G VN group management portal through NEF capability opening, which can support users to create, modify, delete and other management operations on 5G VN groups. Create, modify, delete and other management operations performed by the group. However, if the existing network deployment method in which one DNN corresponds to one 5G VN group is adopted, each time the user adds, deletes and modifies the 5G VN group, the 5G LAN network needs to add, delete and modify the 5G VN group while performing the corresponding operation. The DNN of the corresponding data network, and adding or deleting the DNN will involve the internal configuration of the 5G mobile network and the configuration of the interface data channel between the 5G network and the data network. In this way, each time the user operates the 5G VN group, it is necessary to manually perform corresponding operations on the DNN related to the 5G VN group, such as the mobile operator, which requires a large amount of manual intervention on the network side, which cannot meet the simple and fast requirements. Manage the needs of 5G VN groups, for example, users cannot add, delete, or modify 5G VN groups without the mobile operator being aware of them.
此外,终端设备在接入5G VN组后才能通过该5G VN组对应的PDU会话进行数据通信。当前终端设备在接入5G VN组时,需要依据数据网络的标识信息,确定要接入哪个5G VN组。但是在上述组网方式下,终端设备依据数据网络的标识信息仅能确定一个能够接入的5G VN组,因此,在数据网络的标识信息确定后,终端设备能够接入的5G VN组也是唯一确定的,终端设备也只能通过该5G VN组中的会话进行数据传输,这极大限制了终端设备选择会话服务和采用会话服务进行数据通信的灵活性。In addition, the terminal device can only perform data communication through the PDU session corresponding to the 5G VN group after accessing the 5G VN group. When a terminal device currently accesses a 5G VN group, it needs to determine which 5G VN group to access based on the identification information of the data network. However, in the above networking mode, the terminal device can only determine one 5G VN group that can be accessed according to the identification information of the data network. Therefore, after the identification information of the data network is determined, the 5G VN group that the terminal device can access is also unique. It is certain that the terminal device can only transmit data through the session in the 5G VN group, which greatly limits the flexibility of the terminal device to select the session service and use the session service for data communication.
为了解决上述问题,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,用于提高终端设备选择会话服务和采用会话服务进行数据通信的灵活性,进而提高终端设备进行数据通信的灵活性和高效性,同时,降低VN组管理的复杂度,进而满足用户简单快捷管理VN组的需求。In order to solve the above problem, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method, which is used to improve the flexibility of a terminal device to select a session service and use the session service for data communication, thereby improving the flexibility and efficiency of the terminal device to perform data communication, and at the same time, Reduce the complexity of VN group management, and then meet the needs of users to manage VN groups simply and quickly.
下面对本申请实施例提供的方案进行具体说明。The solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application will be specifically described below.
图5为本申请实施例提供的通信方法适用的一种通信系统的架构示意图。图5中示例性地列举了与本申请实施例相关的部分网元及设备。FIG. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system to which the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application is applied. FIG. 5 exemplarily lists some network elements and devices related to the embodiments of the present application.
其中,本通信架构可以兼容多种不同制式的通信系统。图5仅以5G通信系统为例进行说明。Among them, the communication architecture can be compatible with a variety of communication systems of different standards. FIG. 5 only takes the 5G communication system as an example for description.
需要说明的是,本通信架构不对本申请提供的方法所使用的通信架构造成限定,该架构还可以为以下任意一种通信系统:5G通信系统、未来的新一代通信系统,以及基于以上通信系统演进的通信系统。It should be noted that this communication architecture does not limit the communication architecture used by the method provided in this application, and the architecture can also be any of the following communication systems: 5G communication system, future new generation communication system, and communication system based on the above Evolved communication systems.
总之,本申请实施例描述的通信架构是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着通信技术的发展、网络架构的演变,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题和场景,同样适用。In a word, the communication architecture described in the embodiments of the present application is for the purpose of illustrating the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, and does not constitute a limitation on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application. The development of the network and the evolution of the network architecture, the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are also applicable to similar technical problems and scenarios.
图5所示的通信架构由终端设备、接入网(R)AN设备、核心网和数据网络组成。The communication architecture shown in FIG. 5 is composed of terminal equipment, access network (R)AN equipment, core network and data network.
核心网包括AMF网元、SMF网元、UPF网元、PCF网元、AF网元、UDM网元、网络切片选择功能(network slice selection function,NSSF)网元、鉴权服务功能(authentication server function,AUSF)网元、网络切片特定身份验证和授权功能网元(Network Slice Specific Authentication and Authorization Function,NSSAAF)网元等网元。其中,各网元的功能可参照上述对图1所示系统架构中相关网元功能的介绍,网元与网元、网元与设备间的相关接口的功能可参照上述对图1所示系统架构中相关接口功能的介绍,此处不再赘述。The core network includes AMF network elements, SMF network elements, UPF network elements, PCF network elements, AF network elements, UDM network elements, network slice selection function (NSSF) network elements, authentication server function (authentication server function) , AUSF) network element, network slice specific authentication and authorization function network element (Network Slice Specific Authentication and Authorization Function, NSSAAF) network element and other network elements. The functions of each network element can refer to the above-mentioned introduction to the functions of the relevant network elements in the system architecture shown in FIG. The introduction of related interface functions in the architecture will not be repeated here.
在上述通信系统中,接入网设备和核心网为终端设备和数据网络提供数据交换服务,该服务称为PDU连接服务。终端设备通过向网络侧发起PDU会话建立请求,来获得PDU连接服务。网络侧为终端设备维护PDU会话以提供PDU连接服务。In the above communication system, the access network equipment and the core network provide a data exchange service for the terminal equipment and the data network, and this service is called a PDU connection service. The terminal device obtains the PDU connection service by initiating a PDU session establishment request to the network side. The network side maintains PDU sessions for terminal devices to provide PDU connection services.
在本申请实施例中,网络侧可以为核心网,或者为核心网中的一个或多个网元,或者为其它能够实现核心网功能或者实现核心网中一个或多个网元功能的网络系统、设备等,例如网络侧可以为5G LAN、移动运营商网络等,在此基础上,网络侧还可以包含接入网或接入网设备等。In this embodiment of the present application, the network side may be the core network, or one or more network elements in the core network, or other network systems capable of implementing the functions of the core network or implementing the functions of one or more network elements in the core network , equipment, etc. For example, the network side can be 5G LAN, mobile operator network, etc. On this basis, the network side can also include access network or access network equipment.
如图5中所示,终端设备、接入网设备、UPF网元和数据网络之间的通信路径(粗实线所示)为终端设备与数据网络之间的业务数据交换路径,该路径为终端设备在网络中数据业务路径即数据面路径。终端设备、接入网设备、AMF网元、SMF网元、PCF网元、 UPF网元及UDM网元等网元之间的通信路径(虚线所示)为建立PDU会话的信令面流程。As shown in Figure 5, the communication path (shown by the thick solid line) between the terminal equipment, the access network equipment, the UPF network element and the data network is the service data exchange path between the terminal equipment and the data network, and the path is The data service path of the terminal device in the network is the data plane path. The communication paths (shown in dashed lines) between network elements such as terminal equipment, access network equipment, AMF network elements, SMF network elements, PCF network elements, UPF network elements, and UDM network elements are the signaling plane flow for establishing a PDU session.
为了实现终端设备与数据网络之间的业务数据交换,终端设备需要通过网络侧提供的PDU连接服务建立基于数据网络的PDU会话,PDU会话的建立包括两个基本过程:终端设备向网络侧注册入网流程及终端设备向网络侧请求建立PDU会话流程,可参考下文中的相关介绍。此外,上述两个过程属于终端设备与网络侧的信令面交互流程。In order to realize the exchange of service data between the terminal device and the data network, the terminal device needs to establish a PDU session based on the data network through the PDU connection service provided by the network side. The establishment of the PDU session includes two basic processes: the terminal device registers with the network side to access the network For the process and the process of the terminal device requesting the network side to establish a PDU session, please refer to the related introduction below. In addition, the above two processes belong to the signaling plane interaction process between the terminal device and the network side.
其中,终端设备通用的注册入网流程可简单描述为:终端设备通过接入网设备发送注册请求至AMF,AMF根据终端设备的用户标识向特定UDM获取签约数据。此外,AMF还可向PCF发起用户策略控制建立请求(UE policy control_create)及接入管理策略控制建立请求(AM policy control_create),分别用于获取用户策略及接入控制策略。网络侧经过一系列鉴权、授权操作最终确认允许终端设备接入网络,此时AMF响应终端设备的注册请求,并向终端设备下发相关策略信息,终端设备完成网络注册驻留。网络侧AMF维护终端设备的注册入网信息,对终端设备进行移动性管理。Wherein, the general registration process of terminal equipment can be simply described as: the terminal equipment sends a registration request to the AMF through the access network equipment, and the AMF obtains the subscription data from a specific UDM according to the user identity of the terminal equipment. In addition, the AMF can also initiate a user policy control establishment request (UE policy control_create) and an access management policy control establishment request (AM policy control_create) to the PCF, which are used to obtain the user policy and the access control policy, respectively. After a series of authentication and authorization operations, the network side finally confirms that the terminal device is allowed to access the network. At this time, the AMF responds to the registration request of the terminal device and delivers relevant policy information to the terminal device, and the terminal device completes the network registration and residency. The AMF on the network side maintains the registration and access information of the terminal equipment, and performs mobility management on the terminal equipment.
5G通信系统中的两个网络设备之间可以通过相应的接口实现通信,具体可以参考图1或图5所示。Communication between two network devices in a 5G communication system can be implemented through corresponding interfaces, as shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 5 for details.
需要说明的是,图1或图5中所示的N1~N15、N22、N35、N36、N58、N59等英文缩写为5G网络中用以支持在设备与设备、设备与网元、网元与网元之间进行信息传输的通信接口或称参考点,可以参考5G相关通信标准中的定义。It should be noted that the English abbreviations such as N1 to N15, N22, N35, N36, N58, and N59 shown in FIG. 1 or FIG. 5 are used in the 5G network to support equipment and equipment, equipment and network elements, network elements and network elements. The communication interface or reference point for information transmission between network elements can refer to the definition in 5G-related communication standards.
需要理解的是,5G通信系统中的以上各网元既可以是在专用硬件上实现的网络元件,也可以是在专用硬件上运行的软件实例,或者是在虚拟化平台(例如云平台)上虚拟化功能的实例。此外,本申请实施例并不限定通信系统中各个网元的分布形式,可选的,以上各个网元可以分别部署在不同的物理设备中,或者多个网元融合在同一物理设备中。It should be understood that the above network elements in a 5G communication system can be either network elements implemented on dedicated hardware, software instances running on dedicated hardware, or a virtualization platform (such as a cloud platform) An instance of a virtualization function. In addition, the embodiments of the present application do not limit the distribution form of each network element in the communication system. Optionally, each of the above network elements may be deployed in different physical devices, or multiple network elements may be integrated into the same physical device.
另外,本申请实施例也不对通信系统中各网元的名称进行限定,例如,在不同制式的通信系统中,各网元可以有其它名称;又例如,当多个网元融合在同一物理设备中时,该物理设备也可以有其他名称。In addition, the embodiments of the present application do not limit the names of network elements in the communication system. For example, in communication systems of different standards, each network element may have other names; for example, when multiple network elements are integrated into the same physical device , the physical device can also have another name.
为了便于说明,本申请以下实施例将AMF网元简称为AMF,将SMF网元简称为SMF,将PCF网元简称为PCF,将UPF网元简称为UPF,将AF网元简称为AF,将UDM网元简称为UDM,将NEF网元简称为NEF。For ease of description, in the following embodiments of this application, the AMF network element is abbreviated as AMF, the SMF network element is abbreviated as SMF, the PCF network element is abbreviated as PCF, the UPF network element is abbreviated as UPF, the AF network element is abbreviated as AF, and the The UDM network element is abbreviated as UDM, and the NEF network element is abbreviated as NEF.
下面结合具体实施例对本申请提供的方案进行详细说明。The solution provided by the present application will be described in detail below with reference to specific embodiments.
一、网络侧:VN组的配置及管理1. Network side: VN group configuration and management
本申请实施例首先提供一种VN组的配置及管理方法,在该方法中,数据网络的DNN与VN组的关联关系为1:N关系,其中N为不小于1的整数,即该方法采用一个数据网络对应一个或多个VN组的组网方式,其中,多个VN组中各个VN组对应的局域网均可接入到该数据网络。The embodiments of the present application first provide a method for configuring and managing a VN group. In this method, the association relationship between the DNN of the data network and the VN group is a 1:N relationship, where N is an integer not less than 1, that is, the method adopts A networking mode in which one data network corresponds to one or more VN groups, wherein the local area network corresponding to each VN group in the multiple VN groups can be connected to the data network.
在该组网方式中,对于同一个数据网络,该数据网络对应的多个VN组均可以通过其对应的局域网接入该数据网络。基于该组网方式,一方面,终端设备在选择接入的VN组时就具有更大的选择空间,从而提高采用虚拟网络组的会话服务进行数据通信的灵活性。例如,终端设备在与数据网络进行通信时,就可以根据实际需求如业务需求,从该数据网络对应的至少一个VN组中,灵活选择相对更适合接入的VN组。另一方面,用户可以方便快捷的对同一数据网络下的VN组进行增删修改等管理操作,且不会造成对数据网络的 DNN的修改,避免了数据网络侧的人工管理的介入,因此能够实现便捷高效的对VN组进行管理。In this networking mode, for the same data network, multiple VN groups corresponding to the data network can access the data network through their corresponding local area networks. Based on this networking method, on the one hand, the terminal device has a larger selection space when selecting a VN group to access, thereby improving the flexibility of using the session service of the virtual network group for data communication. For example, when a terminal device communicates with a data network, it can flexibly select a VN group that is relatively more suitable for access from at least one VN group corresponding to the data network according to actual requirements such as service requirements. On the other hand, users can conveniently and quickly perform management operations such as additions, deletions, and modifications to the VN groups under the same data network, without causing modifications to the DNN of the data network, avoiding the intervention of manual management on the data network side, so it can achieve Convenient and efficient management of VN groups.
在网络侧,VN组的配置和管理可以由网络管理员或操作维护管理(operation administration and maintenance,OAM)负责,也可以是NEF开放服务给AF,由AF进行动态配置和管理。其中,为了支持AF动态管理VN组,NEF对外开放了一系列接口如创建、修改、删除等功能接口,用于AF完成VN组、VN组成员以及VN组配置信息的管理,因此,网络侧支持通过AF与NEF交互完成对VN组的配置管理。VN组的管理主要包括创建、修改、删除VN组等,具体实施时可通过操作VN组的信息实现对VN组的配置管理。On the network side, the configuration and management of the VN group can be done by the network administrator or the operation administration and maintenance (OAM), or the NEF can open the service to the AF, and the AF can dynamically configure and manage it. Among them, in order to support AF to dynamically manage VN groups, NEF has opened a series of interfaces such as create, modify, delete and other functional interfaces, which are used by AF to manage VN groups, VN group members and VN group configuration information. Therefore, the network side supports The configuration management of the VN group is completed through the interaction between the AF and the NEF. The management of the VN group mainly includes creating, modifying, and deleting the VN group. During the specific implementation, the configuration management of the VN group can be realized by operating the information of the VN group.
本申请实施例中,AF可以针对终端设备发起的不同业务配置不同的VN组,终端在发起业务时可以根据业务需求选择对应的VN组进行接入,并由VN组对应的局域网提供服务。In the embodiment of the present application, the AF can configure different VN groups for different services initiated by the terminal device. When initiating a service, the terminal can select a corresponding VN group for access according to service requirements, and the local area network corresponding to the VN group provides services.
在本申请实施例中,VN组的相关信息主要包括VN组的组标识、VN组成员关系和VN组的配置信息三项内容。其中,VN组的组标识可以为外部组标识、内部组标识、网络侧分配的组标识、验证-授权-记账AAA服务器分配的组标识等。VN组成员关系可参照如上表6所示的信息。VN组的配置信息至少包括数据网络信息、切片信息、PDU会话类型(PDU session type)、应用描述符(application descriptor)及默认组指示信息,还可包含二次鉴权/授权相关的信息如使能3A服务器(DN-AAA)进行IP地址分配等信息;除此还可包括可服务区域信息、地址信息等。In the embodiment of the present application, the related information of the VN group mainly includes three items of group identification of the VN group, membership of the VN group, and configuration information of the VN group. The group identifier of the VN group may be an external group identifier, an internal group identifier, a group identifier assigned by the network side, a group identifier assigned by an authentication-authorization-accounting AAA server, and the like. For the membership of the VN group, refer to the information shown in Table 6 above. The configuration information of the VN group at least includes data network information, slice information, PDU session type (PDU session type), application descriptor (application descriptor) and default group indication information, and can also include secondary authentication/authorization related information such as using 3A server (DN-AAA) can perform IP address allocation and other information; in addition, it can also include serviceable area information, address information, etc.
本申请实施例中,VN组的配置信息包含的具体参数如下表8中所示:In the embodiment of the present application, the specific parameters included in the configuration information of the VN group are shown in Table 8 below:
表8 VN组配置信息Table 8 VN group configuration information
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000013
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000013
其中,所述数据网络信息为数据网络的数据网络名称(DNN),所述切片信息为单网络切片选择辅助信息(single network slice selection assistance information,S-NSSAI)。所述数据网络名称用于指示VN组支持接入的数据网络;所述单网络切片选择辅助信息用于指示VN组采用的网络切片;所述会话类型用于指示VN组中会话的类型;所述应用描述符用于指示业务所属应用的信息;所述二次鉴权/授权信息用于进行二次鉴权/授权。The data network information is the data network name (DNN) of the data network, and the slice information is single network slice selection assistance information (S-NSSAI). The data network name is used to indicate the data network that the VN group supports access to; the single network slice selection auxiliary information is used to indicate the network slice adopted by the VN group; the session type is used to indicate the type of the session in the VN group; The application descriptor is used to indicate the information of the application to which the service belongs; the secondary authentication/authorization information is used to perform secondary authentication/authorization.
所述默认组指示信息、可服务区域信息及地址信息等参数信息用于支持DNN与VN组的1:N组网,下面对这几个参数信息进行详细说明:The parameter information such as the default group indication information, serviceable area information, and address information is used to support the 1:N networking of the DNN and VN groups. The following parameter information will be described in detail:
1)默认组指示信息1) Default group indication information
所述默认组指示信息用于指示VN组是否为设定的默认VN组,该默认组指示信息可以通过是否默认组(is default)字段来指示。该字段定义当前VN组在当前DNN下是否是设定的默认VN组。该字段为必选字段,即每个VN的配置信息中均包含该字段。The default group indication information is used to indicate whether the VN group is a set default VN group, and the default group indication information may be indicated by a field of whether it is a default group (is default). This field defines whether the current VN group is the default VN group set under the current DNN. This field is required, that is, it is included in the configuration information of each VN.
当终端设备在当前VN组下建立会话时,如果该终端设备没有通过VN组标识指定要接入的VN组,则网络侧能够根据各VN组的是否默认组字段确定默认VN组,并为该终端设备建立该默认VN组中的会话。When the terminal device establishes a session under the current VN group, if the terminal device does not specify the VN group to be accessed through the VN group identifier, the network side can determine the default VN group according to the default group field of each VN group, and set the default VN group for the VN group. The terminal device establishes a session in the default VN group.
在本申请一些实施例中,同一数据网络的DNN对应多个VN组时,网络侧需从多个VN组中选择一个VN组并将其设定为默认VN组。In some embodiments of the present application, when the DNN of the same data network corresponds to multiple VN groups, the network side needs to select one VN group from the multiple VN groups and set it as the default VN group.
2)可服务区域信息2) Serviceable area information
所述可服务区域信息用于指示虚拟网络组可服务的地理区域范围,该可服务区域信息可以通过可服务地理区域(available geographic area)字段来指示,该字段定义当前VN组可服务的一个或多个地理区域。该字段为可选字段,即VN组的配置信息中可以包含该字段,也可以不包含该字段。The serviceable area information is used to indicate the range of the geographical area that can be served by the virtual network group, and the serviceable area information may be indicated by a serviceable geographical area (available geographic area) field, which defines one or more serviceable areas of the current VN group. multiple geographic areas. This field is optional, that is, the configuration information of the VN group may or may not include this field.
鉴于现有5G通信系统中,网络侧配置开通5G VN组后,默认该5G VN组是覆盖全网的,但是对于某些终端设备来说,其驻留区域可能仅限于相对比较固定的一些区域,这种情况下,采用覆盖全网的VN组为终端设备提供的服务则存在一定的资源浪费情况。In view of the existing 5G communication system, after the 5G VN group is configured on the network side, the default 5G VN group covers the entire network, but for some terminal equipment, its resident area may be limited to relatively fixed areas. , in this case, there is a certain waste of resources in the use of the VN group covering the entire network to provide services for the terminal equipment.
因此,本申请实施例中,作为一种可选的实施方式,AF在创建VN组时,可以定义VN组的可服务地理区域,并在VN组的配置信息中添加可服务区域信息,以适应VN组只需要覆盖部分区域的场景,提高VN组的资源利用率。Therefore, in this embodiment of the present application, as an optional implementation, when AF creates a VN group, it can define the serviceable geographical area of the VN group, and add the serviceable area information in the configuration information of the VN group to adapt to the The VN group only needs to cover some areas, which improves the resource utilization of the VN group.
作为一种可选的实施方式,上述的可服务区域的信息可以由NEF转化成移动网络运行商内部的跟踪区域(tracking area)信息。地理区域的信息可以标记为全部(ALL),表示对应的VN组在移动网络运营商全网可用,当该字段标记为空时可以认为默认值为ALL。As an optional implementation manner, the above-mentioned serviceable area information may be converted into tracking area information within the mobile network operator by the NEF. The information of the geographic area can be marked as all (ALL), indicating that the corresponding VN group is available in the entire network of the mobile network operator. When the field is marked as empty, it can be considered that the default value is ALL.
3)地址信息3) Address information
所述地址信息用于指示虚拟网络组包含的至少一个待分配给终端设备的地址,该地址信息可以通过IP网段和掩码(IP segment and mask)字段来指示,该字段包含对应的虚拟网络组的IP地址段。该字段为可选字段,即VN组的配置信息中可以包含该字段,也可以不包含该字段。The address information is used to indicate at least one address to be assigned to the terminal device contained in the virtual network group, and the address information can be indicated by the IP segment and mask (IP segment and mask) field, which contains the corresponding virtual network. The IP address segment of the group. This field is optional, that is, the configuration information of the VN group may or may not include this field.
作为一种可选的实施方式,在AF通过配置VN组使得数据网络的DNN与VN组的对应关系为一个DNN对应多个VN组时,对于会话类型为IP类型的场景,所述多个VN组中的每个VN组的配置信息包含各自对应的IP地址段。SMF为UPF配置数据报文转发规则时,需要获取VN组对应的IP地址段信息,以便依据该IP地址段信息配置UPF对数据 报文进行匹配和转发的规则。As an optional implementation manner, when the AF configures the VN group so that the corresponding relationship between the DNN of the data network and the VN group is that one DNN corresponds to multiple VN groups, for the scenario where the session type is IP type, the multiple VN groups The configuration information of each VN group in the group includes its corresponding IP address segment. When SMF configures data packet forwarding rules for UPF, it needs to obtain the IP address segment information corresponding to the VN group, so as to configure UPF matching and forwarding rules for data packets based on the IP address segment information.
在本申请一些实施例中,SMF至少可以通过如下任一方式获取VN组的地址信息:In some embodiments of the present application, the SMF can obtain the address information of the VN group in at least any of the following ways:
1)由AF在通过NEF创建VN组时,将该VN组的地址信息通知给SMF。其中,该地址信息通过IP网段和掩码字段指定VN组对应的IP地址段信息。1) When the AF creates a VN group through the NEF, the SMF is notified of the address information of the VN group. The address information specifies the IP address segment information corresponding to the VN group through the IP network segment and mask field.
2)SMF在创建VN组对应的会话时,通过与数据网络对应的AAA服务器交互,从所述AAA服务器获取VN组对应的地址信息。其中,该地址信息通过IP网段和掩码字段指定VN组对应的IP地址段信息。2) When creating a session corresponding to the VN group, the SMF obtains the address information corresponding to the VN group from the AAA server by interacting with the AAA server corresponding to the data network. The address information specifies the IP address segment information corresponding to the VN group through the IP network segment and mask field.
需要说明的是,在5G中,VN组配置信息也可以称为VN组数据。It should be noted that in 5G, the VN group configuration information may also be referred to as VN group data.
为实现AF与运营商网络的协同处理,运营商网络通过NEF向AF开放部分网络能力,以支撑AF对用户进行更灵活的控制。当前NEF支持开放的能力包括:允许AF通过NEF向网络侧订阅用户位置、终端可达性事件、连接状态、漫游状态、区域内终端数量等事件信息,以及通过NEF经由UDM/UDR/PCF向网络侧配置下发参数配置请求、应用路由请求、业务授权请求等消息。In order to realize the cooperative processing of AF and operator network, the operator network opens some network capabilities to AF through NEF, so as to support AF to control users more flexibly. The current NEF support and open capabilities include: allowing AF to subscribe to the network side through NEF for event information such as user location, terminal reachability events, connection status, roaming status, and the number of terminals in the area, and through NEF to the network via UDM/UDR/PCF The side configuration sends messages such as parameter configuration requests, application routing requests, and service authorization requests.
下面以5G LAN场景为例,对AF通过NEF的网络能力开放进行VN组管理的流程进行介绍。The following takes the 5G LAN scenario as an example to introduce the process of AF's VN group management through NEF's network capability opening.
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种AF配置管理5G VN组的方法示意图。如图6所示,所述方法流程包括:FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a method for AF configuration management of a 5G VN group provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 6, the method flow includes:
S601:AF通过向NEF发送参数设置-创建/更新/删除请求消息,调用NEF开放的相关能力实现对5G VN组的管理。S601: The AF calls the relevant capabilities opened by the NEF to manage the 5G VN group by sending a parameter setting-create/update/delete request message to the NEF.
所述参数设置-创建/更新/删除请求消息可以为Nnef_Parameter Provision_Create/Update/Delete Request消息。The parameter setting-create/update/delete request message may be an Nnef_Parameter Provision_Create/Update/Delete Request message.
其中,对于来自用户的创建5G VN组请求,AF在发送给NEF的参数设置-创建请求消息中携带VN组标识如外部组标识,该外部组标识用于唯一标识一个5G VN组。对于更新5G VN组请求,AF在发送给NEF的参数设置-更新请求消息中携带VN组标识如外部组标识和5G VN组的配置信息(如上表7中所示),或者携带5G VN组的成员管理参数(如上表6中所示)。AF也可通过向NEF发送参数设置-删除请求消息,要求NEF删除对应的5G VN组。Among them, for the request from the user to create a 5G VN group, the AF carries a VN group identifier such as an external group identifier in the parameter setting-create request message sent to the NEF, and the external group identifier is used to uniquely identify a 5G VN group. For the update 5G VN group request, the AF carries the VN group identifier such as the external group identifier and the configuration information of the 5G VN group (as shown in Table 7 above) in the parameter setting-update request message sent to the NEF, or carries the 5G VN group Member management parameters (as shown in Table 6 above). The AF can also request the NEF to delete the corresponding 5G VN group by sending a parameter setting-deletion request message to the NEF.
S602:NEF向UDM发送参数设置-创建/更新/删除请求消息,请求UDM对VN组对应的签约数据进行相应操作。S602: The NEF sends a parameter setting-create/update/delete request message to the UDM, requesting the UDM to perform corresponding operations on the subscription data corresponding to the VN group.
所述参数设置-创建/更新/删除请求消息可以为Nudm_Parameter Provision_Create/Update/Delete Request消息。The parameter setting-create/update/delete request message may be a Nudm_Parameter Provision_Create/Update/Delete Request message.
其中,NEF收到已授权的AF发送的参数设置-创建/更新/删除请求消息后,通过UDM提供的Nudm_Parameter Provision_Create/Update/Delete接口,请求UDM创建、更新、存储或删除对应的签约数据。对于未授权的AF发送的参数设置-创建/更新/删除请求消息,NEF执行步骤S606,并告知失败原因。Among them, after receiving the parameter setting-create/update/delete request message sent by the authorized AF, the NEF requests the UDM to create, update, store or delete the corresponding subscription data through the Nudm_Parameter Provision_Create/Update/Delete interface provided by the UDM. For the parameter setting-create/update/delete request message sent by the unauthorized AF, the NEF executes step S606 and informs the failure reason.
S603:UDM通过UDR提供的查询接口发起数据查询及更新,以完成对AF相应请求的相关检验与授权。S603: The UDM initiates data query and update through the query interface provided by the UDR, so as to complete the relevant inspection and authorization of the corresponding request of the AF.
所述查询接口可以为Uudr_DM_Query接口。The query interface may be a Uudr_DM_Query interface.
其中,对于创建5G VN组请求,UDM根据该请求分配一个内部组标识,用于在移动 网络内部唯一标识5G VN组,并通过UDR提供的Nudr_DM_Create接口将内部组标识发送给UDR。对于更新5G VN组请求,如5G VN组成员变更、5G VN组数据变动等,UDM根据AF请求,调用UDR提供的Nudr_DM_Update接口完成相应的信息变更。Among them, for the request to create a 5G VN group, the UDM allocates an internal group identifier according to the request, which is used to uniquely identify the 5G VN group within the mobile network, and sends the internal group identifier to the UDR through the Nudr_DM_Create interface provided by the UDR. For 5G VN group update requests, such as 5G VN group member changes, 5G VN group data changes, etc., UDM calls the Nudr_DM_Update interface provided by UDR to complete the corresponding information changes according to the AF request.
S604:UDM向NEF发送参数设置-创建/更新/删除响应消息。S604: The UDM sends a parameter setting-create/update/delete response message to the NEF.
其中,如果流程有错,则UDM返回错误原因。Among them, if there is an error in the process, the UDM returns the reason for the error.
S605:NEF向AF发送参数设置-创建/更新/删除响应消息。S605: The NEF sends a parameter setting-create/update/delete response message to the AF.
所述参数设置-创建/更新/删除响应消息可以为Nnef_Parameter Provision_Create/Update/Delete Response消息。The parameter setting-create/update/delete response message may be an Nnef_Parameter Provision_Create/Update/Delete Response message.
其中,在上述步骤S602中,若NEF确定AF为未授权的AF,则向AF返回参数设置-创建/更新/删除响应消息,以告知AF请求失败。若流程有错,则返回错误原因。Wherein, in the above step S602, if the NEF determines that the AF is an unauthorized AF, it returns a parameter setting-create/update/delete response message to the AF to inform the AF that the request fails. If there is an error in the process, the reason for the error is returned.
在本申请一些实施例中,在执行上述步骤S601之前,所述流程还可以包括如下步骤:In some embodiments of the present application, before performing the foregoing step S601, the process may further include the following steps:
S600:NF通过订阅消息向UDM订阅签约信息变更通知。S600: The NF subscribes the subscription information change notification to the UDM through a subscription message.
同时,在执行上述步骤S605之后,所述流程还可以包括如下步骤:Meanwhile, after performing the above step S605, the process may further include the following steps:
S606:UDM在VN组信息发生变更时,通过订阅通知消息通知到NF网元。S606: When the VN group information is changed, the UDM notifies the NF network element through a subscription notification message.
UDM若对AF相应请求进行相关检验与授权成功,则当VN组对应的签约数据发生变更时,UDM将发生的变更通知到向该UDM订阅了签约信息变更通知的网元。If the UDM checks and authorizes the corresponding request of the AF successfully, when the subscription data corresponding to the VN group changes, the UDM notifies the network element that has subscribed to the UDM for the subscription information change notification.
图6中以向UDM订阅了签约信息变更通知的网元为NF为例进行说明,实际中向UDM订阅了签约信息变更通知的网元不限于NF。In FIG. 6 , the network element that subscribes the subscription information change notification to the UDM is taken as an example for illustration. In practice, the network element that subscribes the subscription information change notification to the UDM is not limited to the NF.
其中,所述步骤S606仅在步骤S603成功执行时可能触发。The step S606 may be triggered only when the step S603 is successfully executed.
上述流程的具体实施方式,也可以参照3GPP通信标准中对AF和NEF交互管理VN组的相关流程的规定,本实施例不再赘述。另外上述流程中涉及的消息、信令等也可以参考3GPP通信标准中的相关定义。For the specific implementation of the above process, reference may also be made to the 3GPP communication standard for the relevant process of AF and NEF interactive management of VN groups, which will not be repeated in this embodiment. In addition, the messages, signaling, etc. involved in the above process may also refer to the relevant definitions in the 3GPP communication standard.
此外,在5G LAN场景下,AF与NEF交互完成VN组配置后,还通过NEF将配置的VN组的标识、VN组成员关系信息及该VN组的配置信息提供给UDM进行存储,同时,UDM也可以在UDR中存储/更新接收到的VN组配置信息。In addition, in the 5G LAN scenario, after the AF interacts with the NEF to complete the VN group configuration, the NEF also provides the configured VN group identification, VN group membership information, and the VN group configuration information to the UDM for storage. At the same time, the UDM The received VN group configuration information may also be stored/updated in the UDR.
上述实施例中,网络侧采用一个数据网络对应多个VN组的组网方式,能够支持用户方便快捷的对同一数据网络下的VN组进行增删修改等管理操作,同时终端设备可以从多个VN组中灵活选择接入的VN组。此外,通过在VN组配置参数中添加可服务区域信息,能够支持网络侧选择性的配置VN组的可服务区域,减少部分网络资源的浪费,提高VN组的资源利用率。In the above-mentioned embodiment, the network side adopts a networking mode in which one data network corresponds to multiple VN groups, which can support users to conveniently and quickly perform management operations such as adding, deleting, and modifying VN groups under the same data network. The VN group to be accessed can be flexibly selected in the group. In addition, by adding serviceable area information to the VN group configuration parameter, the network side can selectively configure the serviceable area of the VN group, reduce the waste of some network resources, and improve the resource utilization of the VN group.
二、网络侧向终端设备下发可服务VN组列表2. The network side delivers the list of serviceable VN groups to the terminal device
基于以上实施例,在一个数据网络对应多个VN组的组网场景下,用户可同时签约多个VN组,每个VN组均签约了各自的可服务区域,该可服务区域可以是全网覆盖区域或部分网络覆盖区域。Based on the above embodiment, in a networking scenario where one data network corresponds to multiple VN groups, a user can subscribe to multiple VN groups at the same time, and each VN group subscribes to its own serviceable area, which may be the entire network Coverage area or part of the network coverage area.
在本申请实施例中,对于某一VN组,当终端设备处在该VN组签约的可服务区域范围内时,该终端设备才能够在接入该VN组后,使用该VN组提供的网络服务。因此,终端设备可以依据VN组对应的可服务区域信息来选择接入的VN组。In this embodiment of the present application, for a certain VN group, when the terminal device is within the serviceable area subscribed by the VN group, the terminal device can use the network provided by the VN group after accessing the VN group. Serve. Therefore, the terminal device can select the VN group to access according to the serviceable area information corresponding to the VN group.
作为一种可选的实施方式,网络侧可以在下发给终端设备的URSP中携带VN组的可服务区域信息。终端设备在进行URSP匹配时,可以根据URSP中包含的VN组的可服务 区域信息,确定对应的VN组是否支持所述终端设备接入。As an optional implementation manner, the network side may carry the serviceable area information of the VN group in the URSP delivered to the terminal device. When the terminal equipment performs URSP matching, it can determine whether the corresponding VN group supports the terminal equipment access according to the serviceable area information of the VN group contained in the URSP.
具体的,网络侧的PCF下发给终端设备的URSP中包含与其中的业务信息对应的至少一个VN组的可服务区域信息。终端设备在发起业务时,先将发起业务的业务信息,与PCF下发的URSP进行匹配,在匹配到URSP后,终端设备可以将自身所处位置与匹配到的URSP中VN组的可服务区域信息进行比较,从而确定出能够为自身提供服务的VN组,并进一步选择VN组进行接入。Specifically, the URSP delivered by the PCF on the network side to the terminal device includes serviceable area information of at least one VN group corresponding to the service information therein. When a terminal device initiates a service, it first matches the service information of the initiating service with the URSP issued by the PCF. After matching the URSP, the terminal device can match its location with the service area of the VN group in the matched URSP. The information is compared, so as to determine the VN group that can provide services for itself, and further select the VN group for access.
其中,PCF可以从AF或NEF或UDR中获取AF配置的虚拟网络组配置信息,该虚拟网络组配置信息包含AF配置的至少一个VN组的配置信息。其中,VN组的配置信息中包含该VN组的可服务区域信息。Wherein, the PCF may acquire the configuration information of the virtual network group configured by the AF from the AF, the NEF or the UDR, where the configuration information of the virtual network group includes the configuration information of at least one VN group configured by the AF. The configuration information of the VN group includes the serviceable area information of the VN group.
作为另一种可选的实施方式,网络侧将终端设备对应的可服务VN组列表下发给终端设备,该列表包含当前能够为终端设备提供服务的至少一个VN组。该可服务VN组列表用于终端设备在注册入网后,感知其当前所在的注册区域内的可服务VN组信息,进而根据该信息完成业务与VN组的关联。As another optional implementation manner, the network side delivers a list of serviceable VN groups corresponding to the terminal device to the terminal device, where the list includes at least one VN group currently capable of providing services for the terminal device. The serviceable VN group list is used for the terminal device to perceive the serviceable VN group information in the registration area where it is currently located after registering in the network, and then complete the association between the service and the VN group according to the information.
其中,网络侧可以在终端设备向网络侧注册入网的流程中,或者在终端设备配置更新的流程中,将终端设备对应的可服务VN组列表下发给终端设备。The network side may deliver the serviceable VN group list corresponding to the terminal device to the terminal device in the process of registering the terminal device to the network side to access the network, or in the process of updating the configuration of the terminal device.
具体的,网络侧的AMF根据终端设备当前所处的位置信息,通过与UDM、PCF等网元进行信息交互,获取能够为终端设备提供服务的VN组,并生成对应的可服务VN组列表下发给终端设备。其中,能够为终端设备提供服务的VN组签约的可服务区域覆盖终端设备当前所处的位置。终端设备发起业务时,在根据发起业务的业务信息匹配到采用的URSP后,可以结合匹配到的URSP中包含的至少一个VN组,以及AMF下发的可服务VN组列表,选择接入的VN组。Specifically, according to the current location information of the terminal device, the AMF on the network side obtains the VN groups that can provide services for the terminal device by exchanging information with network elements such as UDM and PCF, and generates the corresponding serviceable VN group list. to the terminal device. The serviceable area subscribed by the VN group capable of providing services for the terminal equipment covers the current location of the terminal equipment. When a terminal device initiates a service, after matching the URSP used according to the service information of the service initiation, it can select the VN to be accessed by combining at least one VN group included in the matched URSP and the list of serviceable VN groups issued by the AMF. Group.
其中,AMF可以通过如下任一方式向终端设备下发可服务VN组列表:The AMF can deliver the list of serviceable VN groups to the terminal device in any of the following ways:
1)在所述终端设备注册入网的流程中,通过注册接受消息向所述终端设备下发可服务VN组列表。1) In the process of registering and accessing the network by the terminal device, a list of serviceable VN groups is delivered to the terminal device through a registration acceptance message.
2)在所述终端设备配置更新的流程中,通过终端配置更新指示向所述终端设备下发可服务VN组列表。2) In the process of updating the configuration of the terminal device, a list of serviceable VN groups is delivered to the terminal device through a terminal configuration update instruction.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,在AMF向终端设备下发可服务VN组列表的场景下,PCF向该终端设备下发的URSP中可以不包含VN组的可服务区域信息。在PCF向终端设备下发的URSP中包含VN组的可服务区域信息的场景下,AMF可以不向该终端设备下发可服务VN组列表。It should be noted that, in this embodiment of the present application, in the scenario where the AMF delivers the list of serviceable VN groups to the terminal device, the URSP delivered by the PCF to the terminal device may not include the serviceable area information of the VN group. In a scenario where the URSP delivered by the PCF to the terminal device includes the serviceable area information of the VN group, the AMF may not deliver the serviceable VN group list to the terminal device.
下面结合具体实施流程对可服务VN组列表的下发进行说明。The delivery of the list of serviceable VN groups will be described below with reference to the specific implementation process.
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种网络侧在终端设备注册入网流程中下发可服务VN组列表的流程示意图。如图7所示,该流程包括:FIG. 7 is a schematic flowchart of a network side delivering a list of serviceable VN groups in the process of registering and accessing a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 7, the process includes:
S701:终端设备向接入网设备发送注册请求消息。S701: The terminal device sends a registration request message to the access network device.
S702:接入网设备、AMF、PCF、SMF、AUSF及UDM共同配合处理终端设备的注册请求。S702: The access network equipment, AMF, PCF, SMF, AUSF and UDM cooperate to process the registration request of the terminal equipment.
S703:AMF通过接入网设备向终端设备发送注册接受消息,其中,该注册接受消息携带下发给该终端设备的可服务VN组列表。S703: The AMF sends a registration acceptance message to the terminal device through the access network device, where the registration acceptance message carries a list of serviceable VN groups delivered to the terminal device.
终端设备完成注册流程(registration procedure)后,AMF通过注册接受消息(registration  accept message)向终端设备提供该终端设备在当前注册区内可服务的VN组列表信息。After the terminal device completes the registration procedure (registration procedure), the AMF provides the terminal device with the list of VN groups that the terminal device can serve in the current registration area through a registration accept message (registration accept message).
S704:终端设备、接入网设备、AMF、PCF、SMF、AUSF及UDM共同执行完成终端设备注册的其余处理步骤。S704: The terminal equipment, the access network equipment, the AMF, the PCF, the SMF, the AUSF, and the UDM jointly execute the remaining processing steps for completing the registration of the terminal equipment.
其中,上述各步骤的具体实施方式可参照3GPP相关协议中的规定,此处不再详述。The specific implementation manner of the above steps may refer to the stipulations in the relevant 3GPP protocols, which will not be described in detail here.
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种网络侧在终端配置更新流程中下发可服务VN组列表的流程示意图。如图8所示,该流程包括:FIG. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a network side delivering a list of serviceable VN groups in a terminal configuration update process according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 8, the process includes:
S800:AMF确定更新终端设备的配置或者终端设备需要重新注册。S800: The AMF determines that the configuration of the terminal device is updated or the terminal device needs to be re-registered.
S801:AMF通过接入网设备向终端设备发送终端配置更新指示,其中,该终端配置更新指示携带下发给该终端设备的可服务VN组列表。S801: The AMF sends a terminal configuration update indication to a terminal device through an access network device, where the terminal configuration update indication carries a list of serviceable VN groups delivered to the terminal device.
S802a:终端设备向AMF通知完成配置更新。S802a: The terminal device notifies the AMF that the configuration update is completed.
S802b:AMF向UDM发送SDM通知服务消息。S802b: The AMF sends an SDM notification service message to the UDM.
S802c:AMF更新接入网设备。S802c: AMF updates access network equipment.
S802d:终端设备通知低层服务。S802d: The terminal device notifies the lower layer service.
S803a:终端设备在连接管理-连接态下发起注册流程。S803a: The terminal device initiates a registration process in the connection management-connected state.
其中,在执行该步骤时,如下所述的步骤S803b、S803c、S804可以跳过不执行。Wherein, when this step is executed, steps S803b, S803c, and S804 described below may be skipped and not executed.
S803b:AMF不触发AN释放流程。S803b: The AMF does not trigger the AN release process.
其中,所述放行程序可参考3GPP中的TS23.502协议中第4.26条的相关定义。Wherein, for the release procedure, reference may be made to the relevant definition in Article 4.26 of the TS23.502 protocol in 3GPP.
在执行该步骤时,如下所述的步骤S803c、S804可以跳过不执行。When this step is executed, steps S803c and S804 described below can be skipped and not executed.
S803c:AMF触发AN释放流程,除非存在与紧急服务相关联的PDU会话。S803c: The AMF triggers the AN release procedure unless there is a PDU session associated with the emergency service.
S804:终端设备在进入连接管理-空闲态后发起注册流程。S804: The terminal device initiates a registration process after entering the connection management-idle state.
其中,上述各步骤的具体实施方式可参照3GPP相关协议中的规定,此处不再详述。The specific implementation of the above steps may refer to the stipulations in the relevant 3GPP protocols, which will not be described in detail here.
在上述流程中,AMF在终端设备注册流程(如图7所示)或终端设备配置更新流程(如图8所示)中将可服务VN组列表下发给终端设备。所述可服务VN组列表中可以包含一个或多个VN组的配置信息,如VN组对应的DNN、VN组在当前终端设备注册区内的可服务区域信息等。In the above process, the AMF delivers the list of serviceable VN groups to the terminal device in the terminal device registration process (as shown in FIG. 7 ) or the terminal device configuration update process (as shown in FIG. 8 ). The list of serviceable VN groups may include configuration information of one or more VN groups, such as the DNN corresponding to the VN group, information about the serviceable area of the VN group in the current terminal device registration area, and the like.
VN组配置信息中的可服务区域为一个跟踪区域(tracking areas)集合,该跟踪区域集合为当前终端设备注册区的子集。具体的,AMF下发给终端设备的VN组的可服务区域信息,为该VN组的签约可服务区与终端设备的注册区域的交集。对于交集为空的VN组,表示终端设备在当前注册区内时,该VN组不可用,则AMF无需将此类VN组添加到可服务VN组列表中下发给终端设备。The serviceable area in the VN group configuration information is a set of tracking areas, and the set of tracking areas is a subset of the current terminal device registration area. Specifically, the serviceable area information of the VN group delivered by the AMF to the terminal device is the intersection of the subscription serviceable area of the VN group and the registered area of the terminal device. For a VN group with an empty intersection, it means that the VN group is unavailable when the terminal device is in the current registration area, and the AMF does not need to add such a VN group to the list of serviceable VN groups and deliver it to the terminal device.
AMF可通过多种途径获取VN组的配置信息,如通过PCF动态策略生成,通过UDM签约数据获取等。当VN组的配置信息发生变更时,AMF通过终端设备配置更新或注册流程更新终端设备侧的VN组的配置信息。The AMF can obtain the configuration information of the VN group in various ways, such as generating the dynamic policy through the PCF, and obtaining the subscription data through the UDM. When the configuration information of the VN group is changed, the AMF updates the configuration information of the VN group on the terminal device side through the terminal device configuration update or registration process.
对于一个VN组的可服务区域,终端设备的状态可能为:进入服务区(IN)、离开服务区(OUT)、状态未知(Unknown)。对于终端设备处于各种状态下终端设备及网络侧的行为,可以由运营商策略而定。For the serviceable area of a VN group, the status of the terminal equipment may be: entering the service area (IN), leaving the service area (OUT), and status unknown (Unknown). The behavior of the terminal device and the network side when the terminal device is in various states may be determined by the operator's policy.
在本申请一些实施例中,终端设备也可通过指定VN组的标识,从网络侧获取VN组的配置信息,或通过指示获取VN组的配置信息,来获取全部可服务的VN组对应的可服务VN组列表。In some embodiments of the present application, the terminal device can also obtain the configuration information of the VN group from the network side by specifying the identifier of the VN group, or obtain the configuration information corresponding to all the serviceable VN groups by instructing to obtain the configuration information of the VN group. List of service VN groups.
上述图7所示的流程的具体实施方式,可以参照3GPP通信标准中的终端设备注册入 网流程。上述图8所示的流程的具体实施方式,可以参照3GPP通信标准中的终端设备配置更新流程。另外上述各流程中涉及的消息、信令等也可以参考3GPP通信标准中的相关定义。For the specific implementation of the process shown in FIG. 7, reference may be made to the process of registering and accessing a network of a terminal device in the 3GPP communication standard. For the specific implementation of the process shown in FIG. 8, reference may be made to the terminal device configuration update process in the 3GPP communication standard. In addition, the messages, signaling, etc. involved in the above processes may also refer to the relevant definitions in the 3GPP communication standards.
上述实施例中,网络侧通过配置下发可服务VN组列表信息,告知终端设备在当前注册区域内时,其签约的多个VN组中,可用的VN组以及当前注册区域下每个可服务VN组对应的可服务区,在VN组可服务区发生变化时,网络侧通过终端配置更新流程将更新的可服务VN组列表通知到终端设备。因此,终端设备能够根据实际需求,在可服务的至少一个VN组中灵活选择要接入的VN组,进而提高终端设备进行数据通信的灵活性。In the above embodiment, the network side configures and distributes the list of serviceable VN groups to inform the terminal device that when the terminal device is in the current registration area, among the multiple VN groups subscribed, the available VN groups and each serviceable VN group in the current registration area. The serviceable area corresponding to the VN group, when the serviceable area of the VN group changes, the network side notifies the terminal device of the updated serviceable VN group list through the terminal configuration update process. Therefore, the terminal device can flexibly select a VN group to be accessed from among at least one VN group that can be served according to actual requirements, thereby improving the flexibility of the terminal device for data communication.
三、网络侧向终端设备下发URSP3. The network side delivers the URSP to the terminal device
基于以上各实施例,在终端设备与网络侧进行信令交互的过程中,网络侧的PCF可向终端设备下发相关的用户策略来控制终端设备的行为。当前3GPP标准中定义了两种用户策略,分别为接入网络服务发现与选择策略(access network discovery and selection policy,ANDSP)和URSP。其中,ANDSP可同时由H-PCF(归属地PCF)与V-PCF(漫游地PCF)提供,主要用于指示终端设备选择非3GPP接入网络信息,如接入网络、接入节点等信息。URSP则仅支持由H-PCF提供,主要用于终端设备决策如何为待传输业务数据流选择路由策略,如业务流是否支持分流至非3GPP接入,或者选择特定DNN、S-NSSAI、会话和服务连续(Session and Service Continuity Mode,SSC)模式等信息用于传输该业务数据流。Based on the above embodiments, in the process of signaling interaction between the terminal device and the network side, the PCF on the network side can deliver relevant user policies to the terminal device to control the behavior of the terminal device. Two user policies are defined in the current 3GPP standard, namely access network discovery and selection policy (ANDDSP) and URSP. Among them, the ANDDSP can be provided by H-PCF (home PCF) and V-PCF (roaming PCF) at the same time, and is mainly used to instruct terminal equipment to select non-3GPP access network information, such as access network, access node and other information. URSP is only supported by H-PCF, and is mainly used for terminal equipment to decide how to select a routing strategy for the service data flow to be transmitted, such as whether the service flow supports offloading to non-3GPP access, or selects a specific DNN, S-NSSAI, session and Information such as Session and Service Continuity Mode (SSC) mode is used to transmit the service data stream.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例提供的技术方案应用于URSP场景。It should be noted that the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are applied to the URSP scenario.
在本申请实施例中,URSP包含的参数信息可以参照上述表1。In this embodiment of the present application, for the parameter information included in the URSP, reference may be made to Table 1 above.
具体的,URSP主要由两部分内容组成:业务流描述符和路由选择描述符,所述业务流描述符主要用于描述终端设备发起的业务对应的应用属性信息,所述路由选择描述符主要用于描述数据承载属性。Specifically, the URSP is mainly composed of two parts: a service flow descriptor and a routing descriptor. The service flow descriptor is mainly used to describe the application attribute information corresponding to the service initiated by the terminal device, and the routing descriptor is mainly used for Used to describe data-carrying properties.
所述业务流描述符主要包含应用标识(app ID)、DNN、IP三元组(IP descriptor),域名描述符(domain descriptor)、连接能力(connection capabilities)等参数。The service flow descriptor mainly includes parameters such as application ID (app ID), DNN, IP triplet (IP descriptor), domain descriptor (domain descriptor), connection capabilities (connection capabilities).
在本申请实施例中,所述路由选择描述符包含的参数信息如下表9所示:In this embodiment of the present application, the parameter information included in the routing descriptor is shown in Table 9 below:
表9路由选择描述符参数信息Table 9 Routing Descriptor Parameter Information
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000014
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000015
Figure PCTCN2022071996-appb-000015
其中,上述路由选择描述符包含的参数信息可参考3GPP 23.503通信协议中表6.6.2.1-3关于路由选择描述符的描述。Wherein, for the parameter information contained in the above routing descriptor, reference may be made to the description of the routing descriptor in Table 6.6.2.1-3 in the 3GPP 23.503 communication protocol.
在本申请一些实施例中,在网络侧,PCF可以从AF或NEF或UDR中获取AF配置的虚拟网络组配置信息,该虚拟网络组配置信息包含AF配置的至少一个VN组的配置信息。PCF可以根据获取的所述至少一个VN组的配置信息生成对应的URSP并下发给终端设备,以使终端设备在发起业务时,可以根据URSP选择或建立会话,从而通过会话进行业务数据传输。In some embodiments of the present application, on the network side, the PCF may obtain the virtual network group configuration information configured by the AF from the AF, the NEF or the UDR, where the virtual network group configuration information includes configuration information of at least one VN group configured by the AF. The PCF can generate a corresponding URSP according to the acquired configuration information of the at least one VN group and deliver it to the terminal device, so that when the terminal device initiates a service, it can select or establish a session according to the URSP, thereby performing service data transmission through the session.
在5G LAN场景下,网络侧采用数据网络(DN)与VN组为1:N的组网方式时,PCF配置的多个URSP中包含的DNN信息相同时,VN组的组标识信息可以不同,也可以相同。In the 5G LAN scenario, when the network side adopts a 1:N networking mode between the data network (DN) and the VN group, when the DNN information contained in the multiple URSPs configured by the PCF is the same, the group identification information of the VN group can be different. can also be the same.
在本申请一些实施例中,所述至少一个VN组为网络侧针对终端设备发起的业务配置的,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网。In some embodiments of the present application, the at least one VN group is configured by the network side for a service initiated by a terminal device, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage terminals accessing the virtual network group Devices, terminal devices managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network.
在本申请一些实施例中,PCF下发给终端设备的URSP至少包含业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个VN组的组标识,所述业务信息为所述终端设备发起业务的业务信息,该业务信息具体可包含与URSP中业务流描述符所包含的信息相同的信息。终端设备可以通过将发起业务的业务信息与PCF下发的URSP进行匹配,并根据匹配到的URSP中包含的VN组的标识,进一步确定要接入的虚拟网络组。In some embodiments of the present application, the URSP delivered by the PCF to the terminal device contains at least service information and a group identifier of at least one VN group corresponding to the service information, and the service information is the service information of the service initiated by the terminal device. , the service information may specifically include the same information as the information included in the service flow descriptor in the URSP. The terminal device can further determine the virtual network group to be accessed by matching the service information for initiating the service with the URSP issued by the PCF, and according to the identifier of the VN group contained in the matched URSP.
作为一种可选的实施方式,PCF下发给终端设备的多个URSP中,部分或全部URSP中包含与业务信息对应的至少一个VN组的标识。As an optional implementation manner, among the multiple URSPs delivered by the PCF to the terminal device, some or all of the URSPs contain an identifier of at least one VN group corresponding to the service information.
在本申请一些实施例中,PCF网元获取到的AF配置的至少一个VN组的配置信息中,包含与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的可服务区域信息。其中,所述业务信息为所述终端设备发起业务的业务信息,该业务信息具体可包含如上表9中所示的业务流描述符所包含的信息。所述可服务区域信息为如上表7中所示的VN组的可服务区域信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the configuration information of the at least one VN group configured by the AF obtained by the PCF network element includes serviceable area information of the at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information. The service information is the service information of the service initiated by the terminal device, and the service information may specifically include the information included in the service flow descriptor shown in Table 9 above. The serviceable area information is the serviceable area information of the VN group as shown in Table 7 above.
在本申请一些实施例中,所述配置信息还可以包含如下至少一项:数据网络名称;单网络切片选择辅助信息;会话类型;应用描述符;二次鉴权/授权信息;是否默认组指示信息;地址信息。具体可参照如上表7中所示的对应信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the configuration information may further include at least one of the following: data network name; single network slice selection auxiliary information; session type; application descriptor; secondary authentication/authorization information; information; address information. For details, refer to the corresponding information shown in Table 7 above.
在本申请一些实施例中,所述URSP还可以包含与所述业务信息对应的所述至少一个虚拟网络的可服务区域信息。通过该可服务区域信息,终端设备能够确定选择的VN组是否为能够接入的VN组。其中,所述可服务区域信息为可选信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the URSP may further include serviceable area information of the at least one virtual network corresponding to the service information. Through the serviceable area information, the terminal device can determine whether the selected VN group is an accessible VN group. The serviceable area information is optional information.
具体实施时,PCF可以选择在下发给终端设备的URSP中是否添加所述可服务区域信息。终端设备在匹配到业务采用的URSP后,如果确定匹配到的URSP中包含可服务区域信息,则终端设备可以根据该可服务区域信息确定对应的VN组是否支持自身接入,并进一步选择接入的VN组;如果确定匹配到的URSP中不包含可服务区域信息,则终端设备可以认为该URSP对应的VN组是默认可用的,并可以结合AMF下发的可服务VN组列表,进一步选择接入的VN组。During specific implementation, the PCF can choose whether to add the serviceable area information in the URSP delivered to the terminal device. After the terminal device matches the URSP used by the service, if it is determined that the matched URSP contains serviceable area information, the terminal device can determine whether the corresponding VN group supports its own access according to the serviceable area information, and further select access. If it is determined that the matched URSP does not contain serviceable area information, the terminal device can consider that the VN group corresponding to the URSP is available by default, and can further select the serviceable VN group list issued by the AMF. Enter the VN group.
上述实施例中,PCF网元从网络侧其它网元中获取AF配置的至少一个VN组的配置信息,还可以同时获取各VN组的标识及VN组对应的可服务区域,并携带在生成的URSP中下发给终端设备,则终端设备在发起业务时,能够根据业务信息灵活选择为该终端设备提供服务的VN组进行接入,同时能够适应一个数据网络对应多个VN组的组网场景。In the above embodiment, the PCF network element obtains the configuration information of at least one VN group configured by the AF from other network elements on the network side, and can also obtain the identifier of each VN group and the serviceable area corresponding to the VN group at the same time, and carry it in the generated VN group. The URSP is delivered to the terminal device. When the terminal device initiates a service, it can flexibly select the VN group that provides services for the terminal device for access according to the service information. At the same time, it can adapt to the networking scenario where one data network corresponds to multiple VN groups. .
四、终端设备:发起业务时,通过会话进行数据通信Fourth, terminal equipment: when initiating business, data communication is carried out through sessions
基于以上各实施例,网络侧通过可服务VN组列表信息,将终端设备在其注册区域范围内可接入的至少一个VN组的信息下发给终端设备后,终端设备就能在发起特定业务/应用时,根据业务需求,在所述至少一个VN组中选择一个VN组接入,从而在接入VN组后利用VN组中的会话进行业务数据传输。Based on the above embodiments, after the network side sends the information of at least one VN group that the terminal device can access within its registration area to the terminal device through the list of serviceable VN groups, the terminal device can initiate a specific service / During application, according to service requirements, select a VN group to access from the at least one VN group, so as to use the session in the VN group to perform service data transmission after accessing the VN group.
下面对终端设备发起业务时,通过会话进行数据通信的方法进行详细介绍。The following describes in detail a method for performing data communication through a session when a terminal device initiates a service.
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的示意图。如图9所示,所述方法包括:FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 9, the method includes:
S901:终端设备在发起目标业务时,根据所述目标业务的业务信息,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组;其中,所述至少一个虚拟网络组为网络侧针对所述目标业务配置,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网。S901: When initiating a target service, a terminal device selects a target virtual network group from at least one virtual network group according to service information of the target service; wherein, the at least one virtual network group is configured by the network side for the target service , each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage terminal devices accessing the virtual network group, and the terminal devices managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network.
在本申请一些实施例中,终端设备判断需发起目标业务时,首先通过URSP匹配,在至少一个URSP中,选择与所述目标业务的业务信息匹配的目标URSP,其中,所述目标URSP包含所述业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个可用VN组的组标识。然后在所述至少一个VN组中,选择包含在所述至少一个可用VN组中的所述目标VN组。确定目标VN组后,终端设备再在已建立的会话中,选择与所述目标URSP匹配的所述目标会话;或者向SMF发送会话创建请求,请求SMF创建所述目标会话,从而利用所述目标会 话进行数据通信。其中,所述会话创建请求携带所述目标VN组的组标识。In some embodiments of the present application, when the terminal device determines that a target service needs to be initiated, it first matches the URSP, and selects a target URSP that matches the service information of the target service in at least one URSP, wherein the target URSP includes all The service information and the group identifier of at least one available VN group corresponding to the service information. Then, in the at least one VN group, the target VN group included in the at least one available VN group is selected. After determining the target VN group, the terminal device selects the target session that matches the target URSP in the established session; or sends a session creation request to the SMF, requesting the SMF to create the target session, so as to use the target session Session for data communication. Wherein, the session creation request carries the group identifier of the target VN group.
在本申请一些实施例中,上述的至少一个URSP可以为PCF在所述终端设备发起目标业务之前,下发给所述终端设备的。上述的至少一个VN组可以为AMF下发给所述终端设备的可服务VN组列表包含的部分或全部VN组,其中,所述可服务虚拟网络组列表包含所述目标虚拟网络组。In some embodiments of the present application, the above-mentioned at least one URSP may be delivered to the terminal device by the PCF before the terminal device initiates the target service. The above-mentioned at least one VN group may be part or all of the VN groups included in the serviceable VN group list delivered by the AMF to the terminal device, wherein the serviceable virtual network group list includes the target virtual network group.
其中,如以上实施例中相关内容的介绍,终端设备在进行URSP匹配确定目标VN组之前,接收PCF下发的所述至少一个URSP。Wherein, as described in the related content in the above embodiment, before the terminal device performs URSP matching to determine the target VN group, the terminal device receives the at least one URSP issued by the PCF.
可选的,终端设备在进行URSP匹配确定目标VN组之前,还可接收AMF下发的可服务VN组列表。AMF获取到的所述可服务VN组列表可以是从PCF获取,或者是AMF以其它方式获取到的。Optionally, before performing URSP matching to determine the target VN group, the terminal device may also receive a list of serviceable VN groups delivered by the AMF. The list of serviceable VN groups obtained by the AMF may be obtained from the PCF, or obtained by the AMF in other ways.
具体的,终端设备发起目标业务时,首先按照URSP规则的优先级,按顺序将所述目标业务的业务信息与之前所收到的至少一个URSP的业务流描述符进行匹配。若匹配到具体的URSP(该URSP也可能是设定的默认URSP,如业务流描述符为全匹配(match-all)形式的URSP),则确定该URSP为目标URSP,其中,所述目标URSP中可能包含一个或多个VN组的组标识,这些组标识对应的VN组能够为所述目标业务提供服务。Specifically, when the terminal device initiates the target service, firstly, according to the priority of the URSP rule, the service information of the target service is sequentially matched with the service flow descriptor of at least one URSP received before. If a specific URSP is matched (the URSP may also be a set default URSP, for example, the service flow descriptor is a URSP in the form of a match-all), then the URSP is determined as a target URSP, wherein the target URSP may contain group identifiers of one or more VN groups, and the VN groups corresponding to these group identifiers can provide services for the target service.
终端设备确定目标URSP后,根据所述至少一个VN组,以及所述目标URSP中包含的一个或多个VN组的组标识,确定一个VN组作为目标VN组。具体的,在所述至少一个VN组为PCF下发的可服务VN组列表中包含的全部VN组时,所述终端设备可以据URSP中多条路由选择描述符的优先级,选择其中优先级最高的路由选择描述符(RSD)对应的、且包含在所述可服务VN组列表中的VN组作为目标VN组;或者在同一条路由选择描述符中任选一个包含在所述可服务VN组列表中的VN组作为目标VN组。After determining the target URSP, the terminal device determines one VN group as the target VN group according to the at least one VN group and the group identifiers of one or more VN groups included in the target URSP. Specifically, when the at least one VN group is all the VN groups included in the serviceable VN group list issued by the PCF, the terminal device may select the priority among the multiple routing descriptors according to the priorities of the URSP. The VN group corresponding to the highest routing descriptor (RSD) and included in the serviceable VN group list is used as the target VN group; or any one of the same routing descriptor is included in the serviceable VN group The VN group in the group list is used as the target VN group.
终端设备确定目标VN组后,再判断在已建立的会话中,是否存在已有会话符合该目标URSP中路由选择描述符的定义。若存在已有会话所对应的DNN、S-NSSAI、SSC模式及VN组标识等信息与目标URSP的业务流描述符的信息一致,则终端设备可以选择在已有会话承载业务,或者发起对该已有会话的修改,利用修改后的会话承载业务。若已建立的会话均无法与目标URSP的路由选择描述符信息匹配,则终端设备为目标业务发起会话创建请求,来请求SMF为所述目标业务建立对应的目标会话。After the terminal device determines the target VN group, it then judges whether there is an existing session in the established session that conforms to the definition of the routing descriptor in the target URSP. If there is information such as DNN, S-NSSAI, SSC mode and VN group identifier corresponding to the existing session consistent with the information in the service flow descriptor of the target URSP, the terminal device can choose to carry the service in the existing session, or initiate the For modification of an existing session, the modified session is used to carry services. If none of the established sessions can match the routing descriptor information of the target URSP, the terminal device initiates a session creation request for the target service to request the SMF to establish a corresponding target session for the target service.
在本申请一些实施例中,所述会话可以为IP类型、以太网类型等类型的会话。所述组标识可以为外部组标识、内部组标识、网络侧分配的组标识、验证-授权-记账AAA服务器分配的组标识中的任一种标识。In some embodiments of the present application, the session may be a session of an IP type, an Ethernet type, or the like. The group identifier may be any one of an external group identifier, an internal group identifier, a group identifier assigned by the network side, and a group identifier assigned by the authentication-authorization-accounting AAA server.
本申请实施例中以承载数据业务的会话为IP类型的会话(PDU会话)为例进行说明。In the embodiments of the present application, the session carrying the data service is an IP type session (PDU session) as an example for description.
终端设备发起对已有PDU会话的修改时,可以在已有PDU会话基础上发起PDU会话修改请求,该请求消息中可携带参数包括当前PDU会话标识(PDU Session ID)、N1 SM Container(PDU会话修改请求(PDU会话标识,包过滤器(packet filters),操作(Operation),请求的QoS(Requested QoS)));其中PDU会话标识用于AMF关联至具体会话上下文,N1 SM Container则由AMF透传至SMF。When a terminal device initiates a modification to an existing PDU session, it can initiate a PDU session modification request based on the existing PDU session. The request message can carry parameters including the current PDU session ID (PDU Session ID), N1 SM Container (PDU session ID), and N1 SM Container (PDU session ID). Modify the request (PDU session ID, packet filters, Operation, Requested QoS)); the PDU session ID is used to associate the AMF with the specific session context, and the N1 SM Container is transparently transmitted by the AMF. to SMF.
作为一种可选的实施方式,终端设备在向SMF发送会话创建请求,以请求SMF创建所述目标会话时,在会话创建请求中携带通过上述URSP匹配确定的目标VN组的组标识,SMF接收到携带该组标识的会话创建请求后,根据该标识确定所述目标VN组,并建立所述目标VN组中的目标会话,来承载终端设备发起的目标业务。As an optional implementation manner, when the terminal device sends a session creation request to the SMF to request the SMF to create the target session, the session creation request carries the group identifier of the target VN group determined through the above URSP matching, and the SMF receives the After the session creation request carrying the group identifier is reached, the target VN group is determined according to the identifier, and a target session in the target VN group is established to carry the target service initiated by the terminal device.
其中,终端设备通过向AMF发送所述会话创建请求,由AMF发送至SMF。终端设备发送给AMF的会话创建请求中还携带新分配的PDU会话标识及匹配到的URSP的路由选择描述符中的DNN、S-NSSAI、N1 SM Container(SSC模式,PDU会话类型)等参数。上述参数中,新分配的PDU会话标识用于标识会话创建请求所对应的PDU会话,DNN和S-NSSAI则作为AMF为该会话创建请求选择SMF网元实体的参数,N1 SM Container则由AMF透传至所选择的SMF。The terminal device sends the session creation request to the AMF, and the AMF sends the request to the SMF. The session creation request sent by the terminal device to the AMF also carries the newly allocated PDU session identifier and the matched parameters such as DNN, S-NSSAI, and N1 SM Container (SSC mode, PDU session type) in the routing descriptor of the URSP. Among the above parameters, the newly allocated PDU session identifier is used to identify the PDU session corresponding to the session creation request, the DNN and S-NSSAI are used as the parameters for the AMF to select the SMF network element entity for the session creation request, and the N1 SM Container is transparently transmitted by the AMF. to the selected SMF.
S902:终端设备确定所述目标业务在所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话,并通过所述目标会话进行数据传输。S902: The terminal device determines a target session of the target service in the target virtual network group, and performs data transmission through the target session.
上述终端设备通过采用已有会话、修改已有会话或创建新的会话等方式确定用于承载目标业务的目标会话后,可以通过该目标会话,与目标数据网络、目标虚拟网络组中的其它终端设备或其它虚拟网络组中的终端设备进行数据传输,其中,其它虚拟网络组为除目标虚拟网络组以外的虚拟网络组。After the above-mentioned terminal device determines the target session for carrying the target service by adopting an existing session, modifying an existing session, or creating a new session, etc., it can communicate with other terminals in the target data network and the target virtual network group through the target session. The device or terminal devices in other virtual network groups perform data transmission, wherein the other virtual network groups are virtual network groups other than the target virtual network group.
上述实施例中,终端设备在发起业务时,可以在网络侧针对终端业务配置的至少一个VN组中,根据业务信息灵活选择接入的目标VN组,并通过该目标VN组中的会话进行数据通信,提高了终端设备接入(VN组对应的)局域网的灵活性,进一步提高了终端设备进行数据通信的灵活性和高效性。In the above embodiment, when a terminal device initiates a service, it can flexibly select a target VN group to access in at least one VN group configured for the terminal service on the network side according to the service information, and perform data processing through the session in the target VN group. The communication improves the flexibility of the terminal equipment to access the local area network (corresponding to the VN group), and further improves the flexibility and efficiency of the terminal equipment for data communication.
下面对PDU会话的创建方法进行说明。The method for creating a PDU session is described below.
通用的PDU会话建立流程可简单描述为:终端设备通过接入网设备发送创建PDU会话的会话创建请求到AMF,AMF选择SMF为终端设备提供会话服务,保存选择的SMF与PDU会话的对应关系,并将会话创建请求发送至SMF,SMF为终端设备选择相应UPF建立用户面传输路径,并为其分配IP地址,完成PDU会话创建。在此过程中,SMF还将向PCF发起策略控制会话建立请求,用于在SMF和PCF间建立策略控制会话,在策略控制会话建立过程中,SMF将保存策略控制会话与PDU会话间的对应关系。The general PDU session establishment process can be simply described as: the terminal device sends a session creation request to create a PDU session to the AMF through the access network device, the AMF selects the SMF to provide the session service for the terminal device, and saves the corresponding relationship between the selected SMF and the PDU session. The session creation request is sent to the SMF, and the SMF selects the corresponding UPF for the terminal device to establish a user plane transmission path, and assigns an IP address to it to complete the creation of the PDU session. In this process, the SMF will also initiate a policy control session establishment request to the PCF to establish a policy control session between the SMF and the PCF. During the policy control session establishment process, the SMF will save the policy control session and the PDU session. Correspondence .
在本申请实施中,在采用一个数据网络的DNN对应多个VN组的组网方式的场景下,一个终端设备可同时签约多个VN组,因此,终端设备在发起PDU会话建立时需要添加用于选择VN组的相关参数,保证终端设备能按预期接入指定的目标VN组。In the implementation of this application, in the scenario where the DNN of one data network corresponds to multiple VN groups, a terminal device can subscribe to multiple VN groups at the same time. Therefore, when the terminal device initiates the establishment of a PDU session, it needs to add It is used to select the relevant parameters of the VN group to ensure that the terminal equipment can access the specified target VN group as expected.
作为一种可选的实施方式,终端设备在向SMF发起的PDU会话创建请求中携带指定接入的VN组的组标识,该指定接入的VN组可以为终端设备在发起业务时,根据业务信息进行URSP匹配确定的目标VN组。SMF接收到来自所述终端设备的PDU会话创建请求后,确定该请求中携带的所述组标识对应的VN组为终端设备接入的目标VN组,则SMF建立目标VN组下的会话作为目标会话。As an optional implementation manner, the terminal device carries the group identifier of the VN group to be accessed in the PDU session creation request initiated to the SMF. Information to perform URSP matching to determine the target VN group. After receiving the PDU session creation request from the terminal device, the SMF determines that the VN group corresponding to the group ID carried in the request is the target VN group accessed by the terminal device, and the SMF establishes the session under the target VN group as the target session.
AF在配置VN组后将VN组的信息提供给UDM进行存储,因此SMF能够从UDM获取VN组的配置信息,从而根据VN组的配置信息创建该VN组下的PDU会话。After configuring the VN group, the AF provides the information of the VN group to the UDM for storage. Therefore, the SMF can obtain the configuration information of the VN group from the UDM, and then create a PDU session under the VN group according to the configuration information of the VN group.
在本申请一些实施例中,SMF在为终端设备建立目标会话之前,先从UDM获取虚拟网络组配置信息,所述虚拟网络组配置信息包含至少一个VN组所对应的配置信息。In some embodiments of the present application, before establishing a target session for a terminal device, the SMF first obtains virtual network group configuration information from the UDM, where the virtual network group configuration information includes configuration information corresponding to at least one VN group.
在本申请一些实施例中,所述配置信息包含如下至少一项:默认组指示信息;可服务区域信息;地址信息;其中,所述默认组指示信息用于指示VN组是否为设定的默认虚拟网络组;所述可服务区域信息用于指示VN组可服务的地理区域范围;所述地址信息用于指示VN组包含的至少一个待分配给终端设备的地址,具体可参照如上表7中所示的信息。In some embodiments of the present application, the configuration information includes at least one of the following: default group indication information; serviceable area information; address information; wherein the default group indication information is used to indicate whether the VN group is a set default Virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the range of geographical areas that the VN group can serve; the address information is used to indicate at least one address to be allocated to the terminal device contained in the VN group, and for details, refer to Table 7 above information shown.
SMF获取VN组的配置信息后,在接收到来自终端设备的会话创建请求即PDU会话创建请求时,能够根据VN组的配置信息创建目标会话,来承载终端设备的数据业务。其中,当来自终端设备的PDU会话创建请求中未携带VN组的标识时,SMF根据VN组配置信息中的默认组指示信息,确定设定的默认VN组,并建立该默认VN组的下的PDU会话。After obtaining the configuration information of the VN group, the SMF can create a target session according to the configuration information of the VN group to carry the data service of the terminal device when receiving a session creation request from the terminal device, that is, a PDU session creation request. Wherein, when the PDU session creation request from the terminal device does not carry the identification of the VN group, the SMF determines the default VN group according to the default group indication information in the VN group configuration information, and establishes the default VN group. PDU session.
在本申请一些实施例中,所述会话创建请求为所述终端设备在发起目标业务时发送的请求,所述目标虚拟网络组包含在网络侧针对所述目标业务配置的至少一个虚拟网络组中,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;所述至少一个VN包含所述目标虚拟网络组。In some embodiments of the present application, the session creation request is a request sent by the terminal device when initiating a target service, and the target virtual network group is included in at least one virtual network group configured on the network side for the target service , each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, and the terminal equipment managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network; the at least one VN includes the The target virtual network group.
在本申请一些实施例中,SMF为终端设备建立PDU会话后,可以根据终端设备接入的目标VN组的配置信息包含的地址信息,为终端设备分配地址。或者,SMF可以通过将目标VN组的组标识发送到AAA服务器,AAA服务器接收到组标识后,能够根据该组标识确定对应的目标VN组,进而根据目标VN组所对应的配置信息,为终端设备分配地址。其中,目标VN组所对应的配置信息包含该目标VN组所对应的地址信息。所述地址可以为IP地址。In some embodiments of the present application, after the SMF establishes a PDU session for the terminal device, it can allocate an address to the terminal device according to address information included in the configuration information of the target VN group accessed by the terminal device. Alternatively, the SMF can send the group ID of the target VN group to the AAA server, and after receiving the group ID, the AAA server can determine the corresponding target VN group according to the group ID, and then according to the configuration information corresponding to the target VN group, the terminal Device assigned address. The configuration information corresponding to the target VN group includes address information corresponding to the target VN group. The address may be an IP address.
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种PDU会话创建流程的示意图。如图10所示,该方法包括:FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a process of creating a PDU session according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 10, the method includes:
S1001:终端设备向AMF发送PDU会话创建请求。S1001: The terminal device sends a PDU session creation request to the AMF.
该PDU会话创建请求可以为PDU Session Establishment Request消息。The PDU session creation request may be a PDU Session Establishment Request message.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述PDU会话创建请求中增加可选参数:VN组的标识信息,用于指示终端设备要接入的目标VN组。As an optional implementation manner, an optional parameter is added to the PDU session creation request: the identification information of the VN group, which is used to indicate the target VN group to be accessed by the terminal device.
S1002:AMF进行SMF选择。S1002: The AMF performs SMF selection.
S1003:AMF向选择的SMF发送PDU会话创建请求。S1003: The AMF sends a PDU session creation request to the selected SMF.
其中,该PDU会话创建请求可以为PDU会话建立SM上下文请求消息(Nsmf_PDU Session_Create SM Context Request)消息。The PDU session creation request may be a PDU session establishment SM context request message (Nsmf_PDU Session_Create SM Context Request) message.
作为一种可选的实施方式,所述PDU会话建立SM上下文请求消息中增加参数:VN组的标识信息,用于指示终端设备要接入的目标VN组。As an optional implementation manner, a parameter is added to the SM context request message for establishing the PDU session: the identification information of the VN group, which is used to indicate the target VN group to be accessed by the terminal device.
SMF接收到AMF发送的PDU会话创建请求后,根据该请求获取或更新用户签约信息,包括如下步骤S1004a和S1004b:After receiving the PDU session creation request sent by the AMF, the SMF obtains or updates the user subscription information according to the request, including the following steps S1004a and S1004b:
S1004a:若PDU会话创建请求携带VN组标识,SMF获取该标识所对应的VN组的签约数据。S1004a: If the PDU session creation request carries the VN group identifier, the SMF obtains the subscription data of the VN group corresponding to the identifier.
S1004b:若PDU会话创建请求不携带VN组标识,SMF获取设定的默认VN组的签约数据。S1004b: If the PDU session creation request does not carry the VN group identifier, the SMF obtains the subscription data of the set default VN group.
具体的,SMF接收到AMF发送的PDU会话创建请求后,如果确定当前终端设备要接入的数据网络为5G LAN网络,则SMF如果确定终端设备发起的该PDU会话创建请求中携带了VN组标识信息,则SMF通过UDM获取终端设备指定的VN组的相关签约数据;SMF如果确定该PDU会话创建请求中未携带VN组标识信息,则SMF通过数据网络的DNN对应的默认VN组获取对应的签约数据,其中,若终端设备未签约当前DNN对应的默认VN组,则SMF确定PDU会话建立失败。Specifically, after the SMF receives the PDU session creation request sent by the AMF, if it determines that the data network to be accessed by the current terminal device is a 5G LAN network, the SMF determines that the PDU session creation request initiated by the terminal device carries the VN group identifier. information, the SMF obtains the relevant subscription data of the VN group specified by the terminal device through the UDM; if the SMF determines that the VN group identification information is not carried in the PDU session creation request, the SMF obtains the corresponding subscription through the default VN group corresponding to the DNN of the data network data, wherein, if the terminal device does not subscribe to the default VN group corresponding to the current DNN, the SMF determines that the establishment of the PDU session fails.
其中,SMF根据PDU会话创建请求中携带的S-NSSAI、DNN信息,及根据本地配置或者签约信息确定当前终端设备要接入的数据网络是否属于5G LAN网络。Among them, the SMF determines whether the data network to be accessed by the current terminal device belongs to the 5G LAN network according to the S-NSSAI and DNN information carried in the PDU session creation request, and according to the local configuration or subscription information.
S1005:SMF向AMF发送PDU会话创建响应。S1005: The SMF sends a PDU session creation response to the AMF.
其中,该PDU会话创建响应可以为PDU会话建立SM上下文响应消息(Nsmf_PDU Session_Create SM Context Request)响应消息。The PDU session creation response may be a PDU session establishment SM context response message (Nsmf_PDU Session_Create SM Context Request) response message.
S1006:PDU会话验证/授权。S1006: PDU session authentication/authorization.
对于接入到VN组的终端设备,SMF可以通过DN-AAA服务器进行二次鉴权,以及分配终端设备的IP地址。本申请实施例中采用DNN与VN组为1:N组网的方式,因此多个VN组归属于同一个数据网络,一个数据网络下的多个VN组拥有各自互不冲突的IP地址段。SMF与DN-AAA服务器交互,进行二次鉴权以及为终端设备分配IP地址时,增加终端设备要接入的VN组的标识信息,则可以通过DN-AAA服务器根据VN组的标识信息从VN组对应的地址段中为终端设备分配IP地址。VN组的标识信息具体可以为外部组标识、内部组标识、网络侧为VN组分配的组标识、AAA服务器为VN组分配的组标识或其他形式参数。For the terminal equipment connected to the VN group, the SMF can perform secondary authentication through the DN-AAA server and assign the IP address of the terminal equipment. In the embodiment of the present application, the DNN and VN groups are 1:N networking. Therefore, multiple VN groups belong to the same data network, and multiple VN groups under one data network have their own non-conflicting IP address segments. When SMF interacts with the DN-AAA server, performs secondary authentication and assigns IP addresses to terminal devices, and adds the identification information of the VN group to which the terminal device is to access, then the DN-AAA server can access the VN group from the VN through the DN-AAA server according to the identification information of the VN group. Assign IP addresses to terminal devices in the address segment corresponding to the group. The identification information of the VN group may specifically be an external group identifier, an internal group identifier, a group identifier allocated to the VN group by the network side, a group identifier allocated to the VN group by the AAA server, or other formal parameters.
S1007:PDU会话建立。S1007: A PDU session is established.
上述图10所示的流程的具体实施方式,可以参照3GPP通信标准中的PDU会话建立流程。此处不再赘述。For the specific implementation of the process shown in FIG. 10, reference may be made to the PDU session establishment process in the 3GPP communication standard. It will not be repeated here.
通过上述流程,SMF成功建立PDU会话即目标后话后,通知到终端设备,终端设备在确定所述PDU会话后,就能在处理目标业务过程中通过所述PDU会话发送业务数据报文,从而利用该业务数据报文完成与目标数据网络、所述目标虚拟网络组中的其它终端设备或其它虚拟网络组中的终端设备进行数据传输,其中,所述其它虚拟网络组为除所述目标虚拟网络组以外的虚拟网络组。Through the above process, after the SMF successfully establishes a PDU session, that is, the target session, it notifies the terminal device. After the terminal device determines the PDU session, it can send service data packets through the PDU session during the process of processing the target service. Use the service data message to complete data transmission with the target data network, other terminal devices in the target virtual network group, or terminal devices in other virtual network groups, wherein the other virtual network groups are the ones other than the target virtual network group. A virtual netgroup other than a netgroup.
上述实施例中,终端设备在向SMF请求新建PDU会话时,在会话创建请求中携带确定接入的目标VN组的组标识,则SMF能够根据该组标识确定终端设备所要接入的所述目标VN组,进而创建对应的PDU会话来承载终端设备的数据业务。同时上述流程适应了一个数据网络对应多个VN组的组网场景,避免多个VN组场景下SMF无法创建正确PDU会话的问题。In the above embodiment, when the terminal device requests the SMF to create a new PDU session, the session creation request carries the group identifier of the target VN group to be accessed, and the SMF can determine the target to be accessed by the terminal device according to the group identifier. VN group, and then create a corresponding PDU session to carry the data service of the terminal device. At the same time, the above process is adapted to the networking scenario in which one data network corresponds to multiple VN groups, avoiding the problem that SMF cannot create correct PDU sessions in the scenario of multiple VN groups.
终端设备通过PDU会话发送业务数据报文完成与其它对象的数据通信的过程属于终端设备在网络中的数据面路径,即如图5中虚线所示的数据业务路径。基于该路径中,终端设备将处理目标业务过程中的业务数据报文发送到网络侧的UPF,UPF接收到来自所述终端设备的业务数据报文后,按照SMF指示的报文转发策略,对所述业务数据报文进行转发处理,从而将该业务数据报文转发到数据网络或其它终端设备,实现所述终端设备到数据网络或其它终端设备的数据通信。The process that the terminal device sends service data packets through the PDU session to complete data communication with other objects belongs to the data plane path of the terminal device in the network, that is, the data service path shown by the dotted line in FIG. 5 . Based on this path, the terminal device sends the service data packet in the process of processing the target service to the UPF on the network side. After receiving the service data packet from the terminal device, the UPF forwards the packet according to the packet forwarding policy indicated by the SMF. The service data message is forwarded, so that the service data message is forwarded to the data network or other terminal equipment, so as to realize data communication from the terminal equipment to the data network or other terminal equipment.
其中,终端设备向UPF发送业务数据报文及UPF对接收到的业务数据报文进行处理的具体实施方式可参照如下第五部分内容的介绍。The specific implementation manner of the terminal device sending the service data message to the UPF and the UPF processing the received service data message may refer to the introduction in the fifth part below.
五、网络侧对数据报文进行处理5. The network side processes the data packets
在5G通信中,终端设备完成注册入网后,可发起PDU会话建立请求,来获取网络侧的PDU连接服务。终端设备获取网络侧的PDU连接服务后,通过对应的PDU会话发送业务数据报文到UPF,UPF将按照一定策略对接收到的业务数据报文进行处理,如将业务 数据报文转发到数据网络或其它终端设备,实现所述终端设备到数据网络或其它终端设备的数据通信。In 5G communication, after the terminal device completes the registration and access to the network, it can initiate a PDU session establishment request to obtain the PDU connection service on the network side. After the terminal device obtains the PDU connection service on the network side, it sends the service data packet to the UPF through the corresponding PDU session. The UPF will process the received service data packet according to certain policies, such as forwarding the service data packet to the data network. or other terminal equipment, to implement data communication from the terminal equipment to a data network or other terminal equipment.
下面对UPF处理接收到的业务数据报文的方法进行详细介绍。The method for processing the received service data packet by the UPF is described in detail below.
当前5G LAN场景中,UPF在如图3所示的对数据报文采用一次匹配、转发方式的基础上进一步发展为如图11所示的对数据报文采用两次匹配、转发的方式。图11为5G LAN场景中UPF对数据报文进行转发的示意图。In the current 5G LAN scenario, UPF further develops the method of matching and forwarding data packets twice as shown in Figure 11 based on the one-time matching and forwarding method for data packets as shown in Figure 3. Figure 11 is a schematic diagram of UPF forwarding data packets in a 5G LAN scenario.
其中,相对图3所示的UPF报文转发方式,图11所示的UPF报文转发方式的主要改进包括:Wherein, compared with the UPF packet forwarding mode shown in Figure 3, the main improvements of the UPF packet forwarding mode shown in Figure 11 include:
1)UPF内部增加了(5G)VN内部(Internal)接口,在终端N4会话基础上增加了组N4会话(group-level N4 Session),且不同UPF之间增加N19接口。1) The (5G) VN internal (Internal) interface is added inside the UPF, the group-level N4 session (group-level N4 Session) is added on the basis of the terminal N4 session, and the N19 interface is added between different UPFs.
2)根据UPF收到的业务数据报文(业务数据包)目的地址的不同,业务数据报文可以在UPF进行本地交互并被发送到同UPF内的目的终端设备;或者可以经过N6接口被发送到数据网络侧;或者可以经过N19接口被发送到其它UPF上,进而通过其它UPF被发送到该UPF下的目的终端设备。2) According to the different destination addresses of the service data packets (service data packets) received by the UPF, the service data packets can be locally interacted in the UPF and sent to the destination terminal equipment in the same UPF; or can be sent through the N6 interface to the data network side; or can be sent to other UPFs through the N19 interface, and then sent to the destination terminal device under the UPF through other UPFs.
基于以上改进,在引入VN组的5G LAN场景下,UPF对数据报文进行匹配转发的过程主要包括如下两种场景中的处理过程:Based on the above improvements, in the 5G LAN scenario where the VN group is introduced, the process of matching and forwarding data packets by UPF mainly includes the following two scenarios:
1)对应属于同一个(5G)VN组的多个终端设备均在同一个PSA UPF下的场景。1) Corresponding to the scenario where multiple terminal devices belonging to the same (5G) VN group are all under the same PSA UPF.
此场景下,UPF采用本地交换完成同一VN组内终端设备之间的数据交换。详细过程为:UPF通过N3口接收到源终端设备发往目的终端设备的数据报文后,经过PDR匹配后(其中,基于报文的封装用户协议(GPRS tunneling protocol-user,GTP-U)报文头完成匹配(第一轮PDR匹配))获得源终端N4会话,对应的FAR指示将报文转发到VN内部接口进行第二轮PDR匹配(基于报文目的IP地址完成匹配)获得目的终端N4会话,对应的FAR指示将报文通过N3接口转发到目的终端设备。In this scenario, UPF uses local switching to complete data exchange between terminal devices in the same VN group. The detailed process is as follows: after the UPF receives the data message sent by the source terminal device to the destination terminal device through the N3 port, after PDR matching (among them, the message-based encapsulation user protocol (GPRS tunneling protocol-user, GTP-U) The packet header is matched (the first round of PDR matching) to obtain the source terminal N4 session, and the corresponding FAR indicates that the packet is forwarded to the internal interface of the VN for the second round of PDR matching (matching is completed based on the destination IP address of the packet) to obtain the destination terminal N4 session, the corresponding FAR indicates that the packet is forwarded to the destination terminal device through the N3 interface.
2)同一VN组内的两个相互通信的终端设备不在同一个PSA UPF下的场景。2) Scenarios in which two terminal devices communicating with each other in the same VN group are not under the same PSA UPF.
此场景下,UPF需要通过N19接口完成数据报文转发。其中,SMF在涉及到的PSA UPF上为VN组创建对应的组级别的N4会话,以启用N19接口的转发能力和N6接口的转发能力。当UPF对数据报文进行第一次PDR匹配并转发到UPF的VN内部接口后,VN内部接口再进行PDR规则匹配(基于报文目的IP地址或条件为全匹配(match-all)的默认匹配规则等规则完成匹配)后,可能匹配到组N4会话,对应的FAR指示通过N6接口将数据报文发送到数据网络侧,或者通过N19接口将数据报文发送到目的终端设备所在的PSA UPF上。In this scenario, the UPF needs to forward data packets through the N19 interface. Among them, the SMF creates a corresponding group-level N4 session for the VN group on the involved PSA UPF to enable the forwarding capability of the N19 interface and the forwarding capability of the N6 interface. After the UPF performs the first PDR match on the data packet and forwards it to the VN internal interface of the UPF, the VN internal interface performs PDR rule matching (based on the destination IP address of the packet or the default matching condition of match-all). After the rules and other rules are matched), it may match the group N4 session, and the corresponding FAR indicates that the data packet is sent to the data network side through the N6 interface, or the data packet is sent to the PSA UPF where the destination terminal device is located through the N19 interface. .
5G网络存在多个VN组的场景下,对于VN内部接口的数据报文,N4会话内的匹配、转发规则属性字段网络实例被赋值为VN组的唯一标识符(例如内部组标识),用于指示该数据报文归属于指定的VN组。例如:对于目的接口被设置为VN内部接口的FAR,其网络实例也应该相应的被设置为指定的VN组;对于源接口被设置为VN组的PDR,其网络实例也应该被设置为指定的VN组。In the scenario where there are multiple VN groups in the 5G network, for data packets on the internal interface of the VN, the network instance in the matching and forwarding rule attribute fields in the N4 session is assigned as the unique identifier of the VN group (for example, the internal group identifier), which is used for Indicates that the data packet belongs to the specified VN group. For example, for the FAR whose destination interface is set as the VN internal interface, its network instance should also be set to the specified VN group; for the PDR whose source interface is set to the VN group, its network instance should also be set to the specified VN group. VN group.
UPF对业务数据报文进行的上述匹配转发的处理均是按照SMF下发的报文转发策略执行的。SMF用于处理VN组的用户面路径,UPF用于处理VN组的数据面路径,因此,SMF会根据VN组内终端设备的PDU上下文信息生成PDR和FAR,并下发给UPF,从而使UPF可对终端设备的数据通信进行控制。The above matching and forwarding processing performed by the UPF on the service data packets is performed according to the packet forwarding policy issued by the SMF. The SMF is used to process the user plane path of the VN group, and the UPF is used to process the data plane path of the VN group. Therefore, the SMF will generate the PDR and FAR according to the PDU context information of the terminal devices in the VN group, and send them to the UPF, so that the UPF can The data communication of the terminal equipment can be controlled.
在本申请一些实施例中,基于以上各实施例,在PDU会话类型为IP类型,以及一个数据网络对应多个VN组的5G LAN场景下,SMF向UPF下发的报文转发策略包括:对于接收到的业务数据报文,判断在至少一个包检测规则中是否存在与所述业务数据报文匹配的包检测规则PDR,若是,则根据所述PDR转发所述业务数据报文,否则,判断所述业务数据报文包含的目的地址和源地址是否属于同一VN组;若确定所述目的地址和源地址属于同一VN组,则不转发所述业务数据报文,若确定所述目的地址和源地址不属于同一VN组,则根据设定PDR转发所述业务数据报文;其中,所述包检测规则用于指示对业务数据报文采用的转发方式。In some embodiments of the present application, based on the above embodiments, in a 5G LAN scenario where the PDU session type is IP type and one data network corresponds to multiple VN groups, the packet forwarding policy delivered by the SMF to the UPF includes: For the received service data message, determine whether there is a packet inspection rule PDR matching the service data message in at least one packet inspection rule, if so, forward the service data message according to the PDR, otherwise, determine Whether the destination address and source address contained in the service data packet belong to the same VN group; if it is determined that the destination address and the source address belong to the same VN group, the service data packet is not forwarded, and if the destination address and source address are determined to belong to the same VN group, the service data packet is not forwarded. If the source address does not belong to the same VN group, the service data message is forwarded according to the set PDR; wherein, the packet inspection rule is used to indicate the forwarding mode adopted for the service data message.
具体的,所述PDR包含的该PDR对应的FAR用于指示对业务数据报文采用的转发方式,包括是否转发所述业务数据报文、将所述业务数据报文转发到哪个目的地址等。所述设定PDR可以作为优先级最低的默认PDR,例如,该设定PDR的匹配规则可以是全匹配规则,对应的转发方式可以是通过N6接口将业务数据报文转发至数据网络,即所有的业务数据报文均可以匹配到该规则,匹配到该规则的业务数据报文将通过N6接口被发送到数据网络。Specifically, the FAR corresponding to the PDR included in the PDR is used to indicate the forwarding mode adopted for the service data message, including whether to forward the service data message, and to which destination address the service data message is forwarded. The set PDR can be used as the default PDR with the lowest priority. For example, the matching rule of the set PDR can be a full matching rule, and the corresponding forwarding method can be forwarding the service data packet to the data network through the N6 interface, that is, all All the service data packets of the device can match the rule, and the service data packets matching the rule will be sent to the data network through the N6 interface.
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种UPF的报文转发策略示意图。下面结合图12对本申请实施例中UPF采用的报文转发策略进行具体介绍。FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a packet forwarding policy of a UPF according to an embodiment of the present application. The packet forwarding policy adopted by the UPF in the embodiment of the present application will be specifically introduced below with reference to FIG. 12 .
参照图12,UPF采用的报文转发策略的具体流匹配、转发规则包括下列各步骤:Referring to Figure 12, the specific flow matching and forwarding rules of the packet forwarding policy adopted by UPF include the following steps:
1)数据报文进入N3接口:根据入口报文接口类型、隧道ID(F-TEID)匹配源终端N4会话及PDR规则,根据匹配到的PDR规则对应的FAR指示,将数据报文转发到VN内部接口。1) The data packet enters the N3 interface: match the source terminal N4 session and PDR rule according to the interface type and tunnel ID (F-TEID) of the ingress packet, and forward the data packet to the VN according to the FAR instruction corresponding to the matched PDR rule. Internal interface.
例如,如图12中所示的UE1发送的上行业务数据报文,通过UE1对应的N4会话,被发送到UE1所属UPF的VN内部接口中。For example, the uplink service data packet sent by UE1 as shown in FIG. 12 is sent to the VN internal interface of the UPF to which UE1 belongs through the N4 session corresponding to UE1.
2)数据报文进入N19接口:根据入口报文接口类型、隧道ID匹配组N4会话及PDR规则,根据匹配到的PDR规则对应的FAR指示,将报文发送到VN内部接口。2) The data packet enters the N19 interface: According to the interface type of the ingress packet, the tunnel ID matches the group N4 session and the PDR rule, and according to the FAR instruction corresponding to the matched PDR rule, the packet is sent to the internal interface of the VN.
3)数据报文进入N6接口:根据入口报文接口类型、数据网络对应的DNN、数据报文的目的IP地址所属的网段匹配组N4会话及PDR规则,根据匹配到的PDR规则对应的FAR指示,将报文发送到VN内部接口。3) The data packet enters the N6 interface: According to the interface type of the ingress packet, the DNN corresponding to the data network, and the network segment to which the destination IP address of the data packet belongs, the group N4 session and the PDR rule are matched, and the FAR corresponding to the matched PDR rule is matched. Indicates that the packet is sent to the internal interface of the VN.
4)数据报文进入VN内部接口:根据接口类型(source interface)、网络实例信息、数据报文的目的IP地址等参数匹配对应的会话和PDR规则,具体包括下列步骤:4) The data packet enters the VN internal interface: match the corresponding session and PDR rules according to the interface type (source interface), network instance information, destination IP address of the data packet and other parameters, including the following steps:
A.数据报文的目的IP地址与源IP地址归属于同一个VN组,且目的IP地址所属的目的终端设备与源IP地址所属的源终端设备在同一个PSA UPF下,则匹配到目的终端N4会话,根据匹配到的PDR规则对应的FAR指示,将数据报文从N3接口下行发送到目的终端设备。A. The destination IP address and the source IP address of the data packet belong to the same VN group, and the destination terminal device to which the destination IP address belongs and the source terminal device to which the source IP address belongs are under the same PSA UPF, then the destination terminal is matched. In the N4 session, according to the FAR indication corresponding to the matched PDR rule, the data packet is sent downlink from the N3 interface to the destination terminal device.
B.数据报文目的IP地址与源IP地址归属于同一个VN组,但目的IP地址所属的目的终端设备与源IP地址所属的源终端设备不在同一个PSA UPF下,则匹配到组N4会话,根据匹配到的PDR规则对应的FAR指示,将数据报文从N19接口发送到目的终端设备所在的目的PSA UPF上。B. The destination IP address and the source IP address of the data packet belong to the same VN group, but the destination terminal device to which the destination IP address belongs and the source terminal device to which the source IP address belongs are not under the same PSA UPF, then the group N4 session is matched , according to the FAR indication corresponding to the matched PDR rule, send the data packet from the N19 interface to the destination PSA UPF where the destination terminal device is located.
C.若上述A、B两个步骤中均匹配不到数据报文对应的PDR规则,则检查数据报文的目的IP地址是否归属于当前VN组对应的网段,即按VN所属网段对目的IP地址进行 匹配,如果匹配到PDR规则,则根据该PDR规则对应的FAR指示,丢弃数据报文,来防止目的IP地址属于当前VN组对应网段的数据报文被匹配到下述步骤D所述的默认PDR规则并被转发到N6口上,避免造成UPF与数据网络的环路问题。C. If the PDR rule corresponding to the data packet cannot be matched in the above two steps A and B, then check whether the destination IP address of the data packet belongs to the network segment corresponding to the current VN group, that is, according to the network segment to which the VN belongs. The destination IP address is matched. If it matches the PDR rule, the data packet is discarded according to the FAR instruction corresponding to the PDR rule to prevent the data packet whose destination IP address belongs to the corresponding network segment of the current VN group from being matched to the following step D. The default PDR rules are forwarded to the N6 port to avoid loop problems between the UPF and the data network.
D.若上述A、B、C三个步骤中均匹配不到数据报文对应的PDR规则,则对目的IP地址以全匹配方式匹配到组会话的默认PDR规则,根据该PDR规则对应的FAR指示,将数据报文从N6接口发送到数据网络;或者如果确定网络侧未配置数据网络则直接丢弃报文;或者将数据报文从N19接口发送到有数据网络的PSA UPF上。D. If the PDR rule corresponding to the data packet cannot be matched in the above three steps A, B, and C, then the destination IP address is matched to the default PDR rule of the group session in an all-match mode, and the FAR corresponding to the PDR rule Indicate, send the data packet from the N6 interface to the data network; or directly discard the packet if it is determined that the data network is not configured on the network side; or send the data packet from the N19 interface to the PSA UPF with a data network.
其中,上述A、B步骤中所述的按目的IP地址进行匹配的规则为最高优先级匹配规则,上述C步骤中所述的按目的IP地址所属网段进行匹配的规则为中间优先级匹配规则,该匹配规则低于所述最高优先级匹配规则,上述D步骤中所述的默认匹配规则为最低优先级匹配规则,该匹配规则低于所述中间优先级匹配规则。Wherein, the rules for matching according to the destination IP address described in the above steps A and B are the highest priority matching rules, and the rules for matching according to the network segment to which the destination IP addresses belong in the above step C are the middle priority matching rules , the matching rule is lower than the highest priority matching rule, the default matching rule described in the above step D is the lowest priority matching rule, and the matching rule is lower than the middle priority matching rule.
上述报文转发策略中,对于N6接口入口报文,匹配条件为数据报文的目的IP地址按所属网段进行PDR规则匹配。此方式中,在5G LAN场景下,当采用一个数据网络对应多个VN组的组网方式时,通过匹配N6接口下行数据报文的目的IP地址所属的网段,可以获得该网段对应VN组对应的组会话及转发规则,最终实现在来自数据网络的多个下行数据报文的目的IP地址在同一个DNN下时也能区分不同VN组的效果。In the above packet forwarding policy, for the ingress packets of the N6 interface, the matching condition is that the destination IP address of the data packet is matched by the PDR rule according to the network segment to which it belongs. In this method, in the 5G LAN scenario, when the networking method in which one data network corresponds to multiple VN groups is adopted, by matching the network segment to which the destination IP address of the downlink data packet of the N6 interface belongs, the corresponding VN of the network segment can be obtained. The group session and forwarding rules corresponding to the group finally realize the effect of distinguishing different VN groups even when the destination IP addresses of multiple downlink data packets from the data network are under the same DNN.
上述报文转发策略中,对于来自源终端设备的上行数据报文,存在下列几种情况:In the above packet forwarding policy, for the uplink data packets from the source terminal device, the following situations exist:
1)如果目的IP地址为与源终端设备在同一VN组内的目的终端设备的IP地址,则上述匹配、转发规则能通过PSA UPF本地交互,或者通过不同PSA UPF之间N19接口进行通信的方式完成同一VN组内不同终端设备之间的相互通信。1) If the destination IP address is the IP address of the destination terminal device in the same VN group as the source terminal device, the above matching and forwarding rules can be communicated locally through the PSA UPF, or through the N19 interface between different PSA UPFs. Complete the mutual communication between different terminal devices in the same VN group.
2)如果目的IP地址为与源终端设备未在同一VN组内的目的终端设备的IP地址,则目的IP地址可能为数据网络对应的其它VN组内的终端设备的IP地址,或者为数据网络侧的设备IP地址,或者该目的IP地址为无效IP地址。则UPF可以不区分这些场景,而是直接将数据报文从N6接口发送到数据网络。2) If the destination IP address is the IP address of the destination terminal device that is not in the same VN group as the source terminal device, the destination IP address may be the IP address of the terminal device in other VN groups corresponding to the data network, or the data network. The device IP address on the side, or the destination IP address is an invalid IP address. Then the UPF may not distinguish these scenarios, but directly send data packets from the N6 interface to the data network.
其中,如果数据报文的目的IP地址为数据网络侧的设备IP地址,则源终端设备与数据网络侧设备是否能通信由数据网络侧的配置策略决定;如果目的IP地址为数据网络对应的其它VN组内的终端设备的IP地址,则两个VN组之间的终端设备能否互相通信由数据网络侧的配置策略决定,如果数据网络侧允许两个VN组之间的终端设备相互通信,则数据网络将数据报文通过N6接口发回到UPF,再由UPF转发到目的IP地址,否则该数据报文被丢弃。Among them, if the destination IP address of the data packet is the IP address of the device on the data network side, whether the source terminal device can communicate with the device on the data network side is determined by the configuration policy on the data network side; if the destination IP address is another device corresponding to the data network The IP addresses of the terminal devices in the VN group, whether the terminal devices between the two VN groups can communicate with each other is determined by the configuration policy on the data network side. If the data network side allows the terminal devices between the two VN groups to communicate with each other, Then the data network sends the data packet back to the UPF through the N6 interface, and then the UPF forwards it to the destination IP address, otherwise the data packet is discarded.
上述报文转发策略中,对于进入VN内部接口的数据报文,如果匹配到组会话默认规则(最低有效级规则),则该数据报文将从N6接口被发送到数据网络。为了防止UPF和数据网络之间出现环路情况(即业务数据报文的目的IP地址为与源IP地址所属的VN组网段下的IP地址,但在数据报文进入VN内部接口后,UPF进行匹配时发生异常,未能成功匹配到非默认规则,该业务数据报文被发送到数据网络侧,但数据网络侧又重新发回到UPF),UPF的VN内部接口的规则匹配中,先按数据报文的目的IP地址所属网段匹配规则(所述中间优先级匹配规则),若匹配到该规则,即目的IP地址为本VN组的网段下IP地址,则认为发生异常,并丢弃该业务数据报文。In the above packet forwarding policy, for a data packet entering the internal interface of the VN, if it matches the default group session rule (least effective level rule), the data packet will be sent from the N6 interface to the data network. To prevent a loop between the UPF and the data network (that is, the destination IP address of the service data packet is the IP address in the VN network segment to which the source IP address belongs, but after the data packet enters the VN internal interface, the UPF An exception occurs during matching, and a non-default rule is not successfully matched. The service data packet is sent to the data network side, but the data network side sends it back to the UPF again.) In the rule matching of the VN internal interface of the UPF, the first According to the matching rule of the network segment to which the destination IP address of the data packet belongs (the intermediate priority matching rule), if the rule is matched, that is, the destination IP address is the IP address under the network segment of the VN group, it is considered that an exception has occurred, and Discard the service data packet.
上述实施例中,UPF对于VN组内的UE发起的上行数据流,如果确定业务数据报文的目的IP地址归属于该VN组的网段,且无法根据目的IP地址匹配到相应的转发规则, 则丢弃业务数据报文,能够避免N6口接收到的报文出现环路问题。In the above embodiment, if the UPF determines that the destination IP address of the service data packet belongs to the network segment of the VN group for the uplink data flow initiated by the UE in the VN group, and cannot match the corresponding forwarding rule according to the destination IP address, Then, the service data packets are discarded, which can avoid the loop problem of the packets received by the N6 port.
需要说明的是,本申请以上实施例中各部分内容所描述的步骤执行顺序仅为执行流程的一种示例,并不构成对步骤执行的先后顺序的限制,本申请实施例中相互之间没有时序依赖关系的步骤之间没有严格的执行顺序。It should be noted that the execution sequence of the steps described in the above embodiments of the present application is only an example of the execution flow, and does not constitute a limitation on the sequence of execution of the steps. There is no strict order of execution between the steps of timing dependencies.
以上分别从终端设备、核心网中的AF、SMF、PCF、UPF等网元,以及终端设备和网元之间交互的角度对本申请实施例提供的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,为了实现上述功能,终端设备和核心网网元可以包括执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请的实施例能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application have been introduced above from the perspectives of terminal equipment, network elements such as AF, SMF, PCF, and UPF in the core network, and interaction between the terminal equipment and network elements. It can be understood that, in order to realize the above-mentioned functions, the terminal device and the core network element may include corresponding hardware structures and/or software modules for performing each function. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that, in conjunction with the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the embodiments of the present application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is performed by hardware or computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each particular application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对终端设备和核心网设备进行功能单元的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能单元,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device and the core network device can be divided into functional units according to the foregoing method examples. For example, each functional unit can be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions can be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units may be implemented in the form of hardware, or may be implemented in the form of software functional units.
基于以上实施例,本申请还提供一种通信装置,用于实现本申请实施例提供的终端设备或SMF或PCF的功能。如图13所示,所述通信装置1300可以包括处理单元1301,还可以包括收发单元1302。所述通信装置1300可以为上述任一实施例中的终端设备或SMF或PCF,或者,所述通信装置1300可以为应用于上述任一实施例中的终端设备或SMF或PCF的装置。Based on the above embodiments, the present application further provides a communication apparatus for implementing the functions of the terminal device or the SMF or the PCF provided by the embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 13 , the communication apparatus 1300 may include a processing unit 1301 and a transceiver unit 1302 . The communication apparatus 1300 may be a terminal device or SMF or PCF in any of the foregoing embodiments, or the communication apparatus 1300 may be an apparatus applied to the terminal device or SMF or PCF in any of the foregoing embodiments.
作为一种实现方式,所述通信装置1300还可以包括存储单元1303,用于存储通信装置1300的程序代码和数据。As an implementation manner, the communication apparatus 1300 may further include a storage unit 1303 for storing program codes and data of the communication apparatus 1300 .
其中,处理单元1301可以是处理器或控制器,例如可以是通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),通用处理器,数字信号处理(digital signal processing,DSP),专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuits,ASIC),现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。其可以实现或执行结合本申请公开内容所描述的各种示例性的逻辑方框,模块和电路。所述处理器也可以是实现计算功能的组合,例如包括一个或多个微处理器组合,DSP和微处理器的组合等等。The processing unit 1301 may be a processor or a controller, for example, a general-purpose central processing unit (CPU), general-purpose processor, digital signal processing (DSP), application specific integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuit) circuits, ASIC), field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components, or any combination thereof. It may implement or execute the various exemplary logical blocks, modules and circuits described in connection with this disclosure. The processor may also be a combination that implements computing functions, such as a combination of one or more microprocessors, a combination of a DSP and a microprocessor, and the like.
存储单元1303可以是存储器。收发单元1302是一种该装置的接口电路,用于从其它装置接收信号。例如,当该装置以芯片的方式实现时,收发单元1302是该芯片用于向其它芯片或装置发送信号的接口电路和/或该芯片用于从其它芯片或装置接收信号的接口电路。The storage unit 1303 may be a memory. The transceiver unit 1302 is an interface circuit of the device for receiving signals from other devices. For example, when the device is implemented in the form of a chip, the transceiver unit 1302 is an interface circuit used by the chip to send signals to other chips or devices and/or an interface circuit used by the chip to receive signals from other chips or devices.
在一种实施方式中,当所述通信装置1300实现本申请实施例提供的终端设备的功能时,所述通信装置1300至少包括所述处理单元1301。In an implementation manner, when the communication apparatus 1300 implements the function of the terminal device provided by the embodiment of the present application, the communication apparatus 1300 includes at least the processing unit 1301 .
所述处理单元1301用于在发起目标业务时,根据所述目标业务的业务信息,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组;其中,所述至少一个虚拟网络组为网络侧针对所述目标业务配置,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组 的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;所述处理单元1301还用于确定所述目标业务在所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话,并通过所述目标会话进行数据传输。The processing unit 1301 is configured to select a target virtual network group from at least one virtual network group according to the service information of the target service when initiating a target service; Target service configuration, each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage terminal devices accessing the virtual network group, and the terminal devices managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network; the processing unit 1301 It is also used for determining a target session of the target service in the target virtual network group, and performing data transmission through the target session.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1301根据所述目标业务的业务信息,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组时,具体用于:在至少一个用户路由选择策略中,选择与所述业务信息匹配的目标用户路由选择策略,其中,所述目标用户路由选择策略包含所述业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个可用虚拟网络组的组标识;在所述至少一个虚拟网络组中,选择包含在所述至少一个可用虚拟网络组中的所述目标虚拟网络组。In a possible design, when selecting a target virtual network group in at least one virtual network group according to the service information of the target service, the processing unit 1301 is specifically configured to: in at least one user routing selection policy, select A target user routing policy matching the service information, wherein the target user routing policy includes the service information and a group identifier of at least one available virtual network group corresponding to the service information; in the at least one In a virtual network group, the target virtual network group included in the at least one available virtual network group is selected.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1301确定所述目标业务在所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话时,具体用于:在已建立的会话中,选择与所述目标用户路由选择策略匹配的所述目标会话;或者,向会话管理功能网元发送会话创建请求,所述会话创建请求用于请求创建所述目标会话,其中,所述会话创建请求携带所述目标虚拟网络组的组标识。In a possible design, when the processing unit 1301 determines the target session of the target service in the target virtual network group, the processing unit 1301 is specifically configured to: in the established session, select a route with the target user the target session that matches the policy; or, send a session creation request to the session management function network element, where the session creation request is used to request the creation of the target session, wherein the session creation request carries the information of the target virtual network group Group ID.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置1300还包括所述收发单元1302,所述处理单元1301在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组之前,所述收发单元1302还用于:在所述终端设备注册入网的流程中,接收接入与移动性管理功能网元下发的可服务虚拟网络组列表;或者,在所述终端设备配置更新的流程中,接收所述接入与移动性管理功能网元下发的可服务虚拟网络组列表;其中,所述可服务虚拟网络组列表包含所述目标虚拟网络组。In a possible design, the communication apparatus 1300 further includes the transceiver unit 1302, and before the processing unit 1301 selects a target virtual network group in at least one virtual network group, the transceiver unit 1302 is further configured to: In the process of registering the terminal device into the network, receiving the serviceable virtual network group list issued by the access and mobility management function network element; or, in the process of updating the configuration of the terminal device, receiving the access and mobility The serviceable virtual network group list issued by the network element of the performance management function; wherein, the serviceable virtual network group list includes the target virtual network group.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1301在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组之前,所述收发单元还用于:接收策略控制功能网元下发的所述至少一个用户路由选择策略。In a possible design, before the processing unit 1301 selects a target virtual network group in at least one virtual network group, the transceiver unit is further configured to: receive the at least one user route delivered by the policy control function network element Choose a strategy.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元通过所述目标会话进行数据传输,包括:通过所述目标会话,与目标数据网络、所述目标虚拟网络组中的其它终端设备或其它虚拟网络组中的终端设备进行数据传输,所述其它虚拟网络组为除所述目标虚拟网络组以外的虚拟网络组。In a possible design, the processing unit performs data transmission through the target session, including: communicating with the target data network, other terminal devices in the target virtual network group, or other virtual network groups through the target session The terminal equipment in the device performs data transmission, and the other virtual network groups are virtual network groups other than the target virtual network group.
在一种可能的设计中,所述组标识包括如下至少一项:外部组标识;内部组标识;网络侧分配的组标识;AAA服务器分配的组标识。In a possible design, the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
在一种可能的设计中,所述配置信息还包含如下至少一项:数据网络名称;单网络切片选择辅助信息;会话类型;应用描述符;二次鉴权/授权信息;是否默认组指示信息;地址信息;其中,所述数据网络名称用于指示所述虚拟网络组支持接入的数据网络;所述单网络切片选择辅助信息用于指示所述虚拟网络组采用的网络切片;所述会话类型用于指示所述虚拟网络组中会话的类型;所述应用描述符用于指示所述目标业务所属应用的信息;所述二次鉴权/授权信息用于进行二次鉴权/授权;所述默认组指示信息用于指示虚拟网络组是否为设定的默认虚拟网络组;所述可服务区域信息用于指示虚拟网络组可服务的地理区域范围;所述地址信息用于指示虚拟网络组包含的至少一个待分配给终端设备的地址。In a possible design, the configuration information further includes at least one of the following: data network name; single network slice selection auxiliary information; session type; application descriptor; secondary authentication/authorization information; ; address information; wherein, the data network name is used to indicate the data network that the virtual network group supports access to; the single network slice selection auxiliary information is used to indicate the network slice adopted by the virtual network group; the session The type is used to indicate the type of the session in the virtual network group; the application descriptor is used to indicate the information of the application to which the target service belongs; the secondary authentication/authorization information is used to perform secondary authentication/authorization; The default group indication information is used to indicate whether the virtual network group is a set default virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the geographic area range that the virtual network group can serve; the address information is used to indicate the virtual network The group contains at least one address to be assigned to the end device.
在一种实施方式中,当所述通信装置1300实现本申请实施例提供的SMF的功能时,所述通信装置1300至少包括所述处理单元1301。In an implementation manner, when the communication apparatus 1300 implements the function of the SMF provided by the embodiment of the present application, the communication apparatus 1300 includes at least the processing unit 1301 .
所述处理单元1301用于根据来自终端设备的会话创建请求,确定目标虚拟网络组,其中,所述会话创建请求为所述终端设备在发起目标业务时发送的请求,所述目标虚拟网 络组包含在网络侧针对所述目标业务配置的至少一个虚拟网络组中,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;所述处理单元1301还用于建立所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话,所述目标会话用于所述终端设备进行数据传输。The processing unit 1301 is configured to determine a target virtual network group according to a session creation request from a terminal device, wherein the session creation request is a request sent by the terminal device when initiating a target service, and the target virtual network group includes: In at least one virtual network group configured on the network side for the target service, each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage terminal devices accessing the virtual network group, and any virtual network group managed by any virtual network group The terminal device can form a virtual local area network; the processing unit 1301 is further configured to establish a target session in the target virtual network group, and the target session is used for the terminal device to perform data transmission.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信装置1300还包括所述收发单元1302,所述处理单元1301在确定目标虚拟网络组之前,所述收发单元1302还用于:接收来自统一数据管理功能网元的虚拟网络组配置信息;所述虚拟网络组配置信息包含至少一个虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,所述至少一个虚拟网络组包含所述目标虚拟网络组,所述配置信息包含如下至少一项:默认组指示信息;可服务区域信息;地址信息;其中,所述默认组指示信息用于指示虚拟网络组是否为设定的默认虚拟网络组;所述可服务区域信息用于指示虚拟网络组可服务的地理区域范围;所述地址信息用于指示虚拟网络组包含的至少一个待分配给终端设备的地址。In a possible design, the communication device 1300 further includes the transceiver unit 1302, and before the processing unit 1301 determines the target virtual network group, the transceiver unit 1302 is further configured to: receive data from the unified data management function network The virtual network group configuration information of the element; the virtual network group configuration information includes configuration information corresponding to at least one virtual network group, the at least one virtual network group includes the target virtual network group, and the configuration information includes at least one of the following Item: default group indication information; serviceable area information; address information; wherein, the default group indication information is used to indicate whether the virtual network group is a set default virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the virtual network The range of the geographical area that the group can serve; the address information is used to indicate at least one address to be allocated to the terminal device contained in the virtual network group.
在一种可能的设计中,所述会话创建请求携带虚拟网络组的组标识,所述处理单元1301确定目标虚拟网络组时,具体用于:确定所述组标识所对应的虚拟网络组为所述目标虚拟网络组。In a possible design, the session creation request carries the group identifier of the virtual network group. When determining the target virtual network group, the processing unit 1301 is specifically configured to: determine that the virtual network group corresponding to the group identifier is the Describe the target virtual network group.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1301根据来自终端设备的会话创建请求,确定目标虚拟网络组时,具体用于:若所述会话创建请求未携带虚拟网络组的组标识,则根据所述虚拟网络组配置信息,将设定的默认虚拟网络组确定为所述目标虚拟网络组。In a possible design, when determining the target virtual network group according to the session creation request from the terminal device, the processing unit 1301 is specifically configured to: if the session creation request does not carry the group identifier of the virtual network group, according to In the virtual network group configuration information, the set default virtual network group is determined as the target virtual network group.
在一种可能的设计中,所述处理单元1301与所述收发单元1302协作,还用于:根据所述目标虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,为所述终端设备分配地址;或者,将所述目标虚拟网络组的组标识发送到AAA服务器,以使所述AAA服务器根据所述组标识,确定所述目标虚拟网络组,及根据所述目标虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,为所述终端设备分配地址;其中,所述配置信息包含所述地址信息。In a possible design, the processing unit 1301 cooperates with the transceiver unit 1302, and is further configured to: assign an address to the terminal device according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group; The group identifier of the target virtual network group is sent to the AAA server, so that the AAA server determines the target virtual network group according to the group identifier, and according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group, for the The terminal equipment allocates an address; wherein, the configuration information includes the address information.
在一种可能的设计中,所述收发单元1302还用于:向用户面功能网元下发数据报文转发策略,以使所述用户面功能网元根据所述数据报文转发策略,对接收到的业务数据报文进行转发;其中,所述数据报文转发策略包括:判断在至少一个包检测规则中是否存在与所述业务数据报文匹配的包检测规则,若是,则根据所述包检测规则转发所述业务数据报文,否则,判断所述业务数据报文包含的目的地址和源地址是否属于同一虚拟网络组;若确定所述目的地址和源地址属于同一虚拟网络组,则不转发所述业务数据报文,若确定所述目的地址和源地址不属于同一虚拟网络组,则根据设定包检测规则转发所述业务数据报文;其中,所述包检测规则用于指示对业务数据报文采用的转发方式。In a possible design, the transceiver unit 1302 is further configured to: deliver a data packet forwarding policy to the user plane functional network element, so that the user plane functional network element, according to the data packet forwarding policy, The received service data message is forwarded; wherein, the data message forwarding strategy includes: judging whether there is a packet inspection rule matching the service data message in at least one packet inspection rule, and if so, according to the The packet inspection rule forwards the service data message, otherwise, judge whether the destination address and the source address contained in the service data message belong to the same virtual network group; if it is determined that the destination address and the source address belong to the same virtual network group, then The service data packet is not forwarded, and if it is determined that the destination address and the source address do not belong to the same virtual network group, the service data packet is forwarded according to the set packet inspection rule; wherein the packet inspection rule is used to indicate Forwarding mode used for service data packets.
在一种可能的设计中,所述组标识包括如下至少一项:外部组标识;内部组标识;网络侧分配的组标识;AAA服务器分配的组标识。In a possible design, the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
在一种实施方式中,当所述通信装置1300实现本申请实施例提供的PCF的功能时,所述通信装置1300至少包括所述处理单元1301和所述收发单元1302。In an implementation manner, when the communication apparatus 1300 implements the functions of the PCF provided by the embodiments of the present application, the communication apparatus 1300 at least includes the processing unit 1301 and the transceiver unit 1302 .
所述收发单元1302用于接收应用功能网元或能力开放功能网元或统一数据仓库网元下发的虚拟网络组配置信息,其中,所述虚拟网络组配置信息包含至少一个虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,所述至少一个虚拟网络组为网络侧针对终端设备发起的目标业务配置,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;所述处理单元1301与所述收发 单元1302协作,用于根据所述虚拟网络组配置信息,生成至少一个用户路由选择策略,并将所述至少一个用户路由选择策略下发至所述终端设备。The transceiver unit 1302 is configured to receive the virtual network group configuration information issued by the application function network element or the capability opening function network element or the unified data warehouse network element, wherein the virtual network group configuration information includes at least one virtual network group corresponding to the network element. configuration information, the at least one virtual network group is the target service configuration initiated by the network side for the terminal device, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, any A terminal device managed by a virtual network group can form a virtual local area network; the processing unit 1301 cooperates with the transceiver unit 1302 to generate at least one user routing policy according to the virtual network group configuration information, and use the At least one user routing policy is delivered to the terminal device.
在一种可能的设计中,所述用户路由选择策略包含业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的组标识,所述业务信息为所述目标业务的业务信息。In a possible design, the user routing policy includes service information and a group identifier of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information, and the service information is service information of the target service.
在一种可能的设计中,所述配置信息至少包含所述业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的可服务区域信息;所述用户路由选择策略还包含与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的可服务区域信息;其中,所述可服务区域信息用于指示虚拟网络组可服务的地理区域范围。In a possible design, the configuration information at least includes the service information and serviceable area information of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information; the user routing policy also includes the service information The serviceable area information of the corresponding at least one virtual network group; wherein the serviceable area information is used to indicate the range of the geographical area that the virtual network group can serve.
在一种可能的设计中,所述组标识包括如下至少一项:外部组标识;内部组标识;网络侧分配的组标识;AAA服务器分配的组标识。In a possible design, the group identifier includes at least one of the following: an external group identifier; an internal group identifier; a group identifier assigned by the network side; and a group identifier assigned by the AAA server.
基于以上实施例,本申请还提供一种通信装置,如图14所示,该通信装置可以为图13所示的通信装置的一种硬件电路的实现方式。该通信装置可适用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备或SMF或PCF的功能。为了便于说明,图14仅示出了该通信装置的主要部件。Based on the above embodiments, the present application further provides a communication device, as shown in FIG. 14 , the communication device may be an implementation of a hardware circuit of the communication device shown in FIG. 13 . The communication apparatus may be adapted to perform the functions of the terminal device or the SMF or the PCF in the above method embodiments. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 14 only shows the main components of the communication device.
如图14所示,通信装置1400至少包括一个处理器1401,以及存储器1402。作为一种实现方式,所述通信装置1400还可以包括通信接口1403。As shown in FIG. 14 , the communication apparatus 1400 includes at least a processor 1401 and a memory 1402 . As an implementation manner, the communication apparatus 1400 may further include a communication interface 1403 .
所述处理器1401,用于执行所述存储器1402中存储的指令或程序。所述存储器1402中存储的指令或程序被执行时,所述处理器1401用于执行上述实施例中处理单元1301执行的操作,通信接口1403用于执行上述实施例中收发单元1302执行的操作。The processor 1401 is configured to execute the instructions or programs stored in the memory 1402 . When the instructions or programs stored in the memory 1402 are executed, the processor 1401 is configured to perform the operations performed by the processing unit 1301 in the above embodiments, and the communication interface 1403 is configured to perform the operations performed by the transceiver unit 1302 in the above embodiments.
所述存储器1402,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器1402和处理器1401耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式,用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。处理器1401可能和存储器1402协同操作。处理器1401可能执行存储器1402中存储的程序指令。所述至少一个存储器中的至少一个可以包括于处理器中。The memory 1402 is used to store program instructions and/or data. Memory 1402 and processor 1401 are coupled. The coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules. The processor 1401 may cooperate with the memory 1402. Processor 1401 may execute program instructions stored in memory 1402 . At least one of the at least one memory may be included in the processor.
所述通信接口1403,用于通过传输介质和其它通信装置进行通信,从而使通信装置1400可以和其它通信装置进行通信。在本申请实施例中,通信接口可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块或其它类型的通信接口。在本申请实施例中,通信接口为收发器时,收发器可以包括独立的接收器、独立的发射器;通信接口也可以是集成收发功能的收发器、或者是接口电路。The communication interface 1403 is used to communicate with other communication devices through a transmission medium, so that the communication device 1400 can communicate with other communication devices. In this embodiment of the present application, the communication interface may be a transceiver, a circuit, a bus, a module, or other types of communication interfaces. In the embodiment of the present application, when the communication interface is a transceiver, the transceiver may include an independent receiver and an independent transmitter; the communication interface may also be a transceiver with integrated transceiver function, or an interface circuit.
作为一种实现方式,所述通信装置1400还可以包括通信线路1404。As an implementation manner, the communication device 1400 may further include a communication line 1404 .
其中,通信接口1403、处理器1401以及存储器1402可以通过通信线路1404相互连接;通信线路1404可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect,简称PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture,简称EISA)总线等。所述通信线路1404可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图14中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。Wherein, the communication interface 1403, the processor 1401 and the memory 1402 can be connected to each other through a communication line 1404; the communication line 1404 can be a peripheral component interconnect (PCI for short) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (extended industry standard architecture). , referred to as EISA) bus and so on. The communication line 1404 can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of presentation, only one thick line is shown in FIG. 14, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
当所述通信装置采用图14所示的形式时,图14中的处理器1401可以通过调用存储器1402中存储的计算机执行指令,使得所述通信装置1400可以执行上述任一方法实施例中终端设备或SMF或PCF执行的方法。When the communication apparatus adopts the form shown in FIG. 14 , the processor 1401 in FIG. 14 can execute instructions by calling the computer stored in the memory 1402, so that the communication apparatus 1400 can execute the terminal device in any of the above method embodiments. Or the methods performed by SMF or PCF.
具体的,图13所示的和处理单元1301和收发单元1302的功能/实现过程均可以通过图14中的处理器1401调用存储器1402中存储的计算机执行指令来实现;或者,图13所示的处理单元1301的功能/实现过程可以通过图14中的处理器1401调用存储器1402中存 储的计算机执行指令来实现,图13所示的收发单元1302的功能/实现过程可以通过图14中的通信接口1403来实现。Specifically, the functions/implementation process of the sum processing unit 1301 and the transceiver unit 1302 shown in FIG. 13 can be realized by the processor 1401 in FIG. 14 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 1402; The function/implementation process of the processing unit 1301 can be implemented by the processor 1401 in FIG. 14 calling the computer execution instructions stored in the memory 1402, and the function/implementation process of the transceiver unit 1302 shown in FIG. 13 can be implemented through the communication interface in FIG. 14 1403 to achieve.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。In the implementation process, each step of the above-mentioned method can be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be embodied as being executed by a hardware processor, or executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software modules may be located in random access memory, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers and other storage media mature in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, detailed description is omitted here.
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。It should be noted that the processor in this embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip, which has a signal processing capability. In the implementation process, each step of the above method embodiments may be completed by a hardware integrated logic circuit in a processor or an instruction in the form of software. The above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field programmable gate array (FPGA), or other programmable chips. Programming logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。应注意,本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。It can be understood that the memory in this embodiment of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory. The non-volatile memory may be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), electrically programmable Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. It should be noted that the memory of the systems and methods described herein is intended to include, but not be limited to, these and any other suitable types of memory.
基于与方法实施例同一发明构思,本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,通信系统中可以包括终端设备、SMF和PCF,用于执行上述任一实施例的终端设备、SMF和PCF所执行的方法,相关特征可参见上述方法实施例,此处不再赘述。Based on the same inventive concept as the method embodiment, an embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, where the communication system may include a terminal device, an SMF, and a PCF for executing the execution of the terminal device, the SMF, and the PCF in any of the foregoing embodiments. For the relevant features, refer to the above method embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
在一种可能的设计中,所述通信系统中还可以包括接入网设备、AMF、AF、NEF、UPF中的部分或全部,用于分别执行上述任一实施例中对应的接入网设备、AMF、AF、NEF、UPF所执行的方法。In a possible design, the communication system may further include some or all of the access network equipment, AMF, AF, NEF, and UPF, for respectively executing the corresponding access network equipment in any of the foregoing embodiments. , AMF, AF, NEF, UPF.
需要说明的是,通信系统中还可以包含本申请上述实施例所述的任一或任多核心网中其它网元或设备,并用于实现对应的功能,此处不再详述。It should be noted that the communication system may also include other network elements or devices in any or any of the multi-core networks described in the foregoing embodiments of the present application, and are used to implement corresponding functions, which will not be described in detail here.
在本申请的各个实施例中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。In the various embodiments of the present application, if there is no special description or logical conflict, the terms and/or descriptions between different embodiments are consistent and can be referred to each other, and the technical features in different embodiments are based on their inherent Logical relationships can be combined to form new embodiments.
本领域内的技术人员应明白,本申请的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此,本申请可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且,本申请可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器、光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。As will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, the embodiments of the present application may be provided as a method, a system, or a computer program product. Accordingly, the present application may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present application may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including, but not limited to, disk storage, optical storage, etc.) having computer-usable program code embodied therein.
本申请是参照根据本申请的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生 一个机器,使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。The present application is described with reference to flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams of methods, apparatus (systems), and computer program products according to the present application. It will be understood that each process and/or block in the flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams, and combinations of processes and/or blocks in the flowchart illustrations and/or block diagrams, can be implemented by computer program instructions. These computer program instructions may be provided to the processor of a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, embedded processor or other programmable data processing device to produce a machine such that the instructions executed by the processor of the computer or other programmable data processing device produce Means for implementing the functions specified in a flow or flow of a flowchart and/or a block or blocks of a block diagram.
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中,使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品,该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory capable of directing a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory result in an article of manufacture comprising instruction means, the instructions The apparatus implements the functions specified in the flow or flow of the flowcharts and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the present application without departing from the scope of the present application. Thus, if these modifications and variations of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and their equivalents, the present application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (31)

  1. 一种通信方法,应用于终端设备,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, applied to terminal equipment, is characterized in that, comprising:
    在发起目标业务时,根据所述目标业务的业务信息,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组;其中,所述至少一个虚拟网络组为网络侧针对所述目标业务配置,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;When initiating a target service, a target virtual network group is selected from at least one virtual network group according to the service information of the target service; wherein, the at least one virtual network group is configured by the network side for the target service, and the at least one virtual network group is configured for the target service. Each virtual network group in a virtual network group is used to manage terminal devices accessing the virtual network group, and the terminal devices managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network;
    确定所述目标业务在所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话,并通过所述目标会话进行数据传输。A target session of the target service in the target virtual network group is determined, and data transmission is performed through the target session.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据所述目标业务的业务信息,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组,包括:The method according to claim 1, wherein the selecting a target virtual network group from at least one virtual network group according to the service information of the target service comprises:
    在至少一个用户路由选择策略中,选择与所述业务信息匹配的目标用户路由选择策略,其中,所述目标用户路由选择策略包含所述业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个可用虚拟网络组的组标识;In at least one user routing policy, a target user routing policy matching the service information is selected, wherein the target user routing policy includes the service information and at least one available virtual network corresponding to the service information the group ID of the group;
    在所述至少一个虚拟网络组中,选择包含在所述至少一个可用虚拟网络组中的所述目标虚拟网络组。In the at least one virtual network group, the target virtual network group included in the at least one available virtual network group is selected.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述确定所述目标业务在所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话,包括:The method according to claim 2, wherein the determining the target session of the target service in the target virtual network group comprises:
    在已建立的会话中,选择与所述目标用户路由选择策略匹配的所述目标会话;或者In an established session, select the target session that matches the target user routing policy; or
    向会话管理功能网元发送会话创建请求,所述会话创建请求用于请求创建所述目标会话,其中,所述会话创建请求携带所述目标虚拟网络组的组标识。A session creation request is sent to the session management function network element, where the session creation request is used to request the creation of the target session, wherein the session creation request carries the group identifier of the target virtual network group.
  4. 根据权利要求1~3任一所述的方法,其特征在于,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein before selecting the target virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group, the method further comprises:
    在所述终端设备注册入网的流程中,接收接入与移动性管理功能网元下发的可服务虚拟网络组列表;或者In the process of the terminal device registering to the network, receiving the serviceable virtual network group list issued by the access and mobility management function network element; or
    在所述终端设备配置更新的流程中,接收所述接入与移动性管理功能网元下发的可服务虚拟网络组列表;In the process of updating the configuration of the terminal device, receiving the serviceable virtual network group list issued by the access and mobility management function network element;
    其中,所述可服务虚拟网络组列表包含所述目标虚拟网络组。Wherein, the serviceable virtual network group list includes the target virtual network group.
  5. 根据权利要求2~4任一所述的方法,其特征在于,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 2 to 4, wherein before selecting the target virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group, the method further comprises:
    接收策略控制功能网元下发的所述至少一个用户路由选择策略。The at least one user routing policy issued by the policy control function network element is received.
  6. 一种通信方法,应用于会话管理功能网元,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, applied to a session management function network element, is characterized in that, comprising:
    根据来自终端设备的会话创建请求,确定目标虚拟网络组,其中,所述会话创建请求为所述终端设备在发起目标业务时发送的请求,所述目标虚拟网络组包含在网络侧针对所述目标业务配置的至少一个虚拟网络组中,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;Determine a target virtual network group according to a session creation request from a terminal device, where the session creation request is a request sent by the terminal device when initiating a target service, and the target virtual network group includes the target virtual network group on the network side for the target service. In at least one virtual network group of the service configuration, each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage terminal devices accessing the virtual network group, and the terminal devices managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network ;
    建立所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话,所述目标会话用于所述终端设备进行数据传输。A target session in the target virtual network group is established, and the target session is used for data transmission by the terminal device.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,在确定目标虚拟网络组之前,所述方法 还包括:The method according to claim 6, wherein before determining the target virtual network group, the method further comprises:
    接收来自统一数据管理功能网元的虚拟网络组配置信息;所述虚拟网络组配置信息包含至少一个虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,所述至少一个虚拟网络组包含所述目标虚拟网络组,所述配置信息包含如下至少一项:Receive virtual network group configuration information from a unified data management function network element; the virtual network group configuration information includes configuration information corresponding to at least one virtual network group, the at least one virtual network group includes the target virtual network group, and the The configuration information includes at least one of the following:
    默认组指示信息;可服务区域信息;地址信息;Default group indication information; serviceable area information; address information;
    其中,所述默认组指示信息用于指示虚拟网络组是否为设定的默认虚拟网络组;所述可服务区域信息用于指示虚拟网络组可服务的地理区域范围;所述地址信息用于指示虚拟网络组包含的至少一个待分配给终端设备的地址。Wherein, the default group indication information is used to indicate whether the virtual network group is a set default virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the range of geographical areas that the virtual network group can serve; the address information is used to indicate The virtual network group contains at least one address to be assigned to the terminal device.
  8. 根据权利要求6或7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述会话创建请求携带虚拟网络组的组标识,所述确定目标虚拟网络组,包括:The method according to claim 6 or 7, wherein the session creation request carries a group identifier of the virtual network group, and the determining of the target virtual network group comprises:
    确定所述组标识所对应的虚拟网络组为所述目标虚拟网络组。It is determined that the virtual network group corresponding to the group identifier is the target virtual network group.
  9. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述根据来自终端设备的会话创建请求,确定目标虚拟网络组,包括:The method according to claim 7 or 8, wherein the determining the target virtual network group according to the session creation request from the terminal device comprises:
    若所述会话创建请求未携带虚拟网络组的组标识,则根据所述虚拟网络组配置信息,将设定的默认虚拟网络组确定为所述目标虚拟网络组。If the session creation request does not carry the group identifier of the virtual network group, the set default virtual network group is determined as the target virtual network group according to the virtual network group configuration information.
  10. 根据权利要求7~9任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 7 to 9, wherein the method further comprises:
    根据所述目标虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,为所述终端设备分配地址;或者Allocate an address to the terminal device according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group; or
    将所述目标虚拟网络组的组标识发送到AAA服务器,以使所述AAA服务器根据所述组标识,确定所述目标虚拟网络组,及根据所述目标虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,为所述终端设备分配地址;Send the group identifier of the target virtual network group to the AAA server, so that the AAA server determines the target virtual network group according to the group identifier, and according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group, is assigning addresses to the terminal equipment;
    其中,所述配置信息包含所述地址信息。Wherein, the configuration information includes the address information.
  11. 根据权利要求6~10任一所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 6 to 10, wherein the method further comprises:
    向用户面功能网元下发数据报文转发策略,以使所述用户面功能网元根据所述数据报文转发策略,对接收到的业务数据报文进行转发;delivering a data message forwarding policy to the user plane functional network element, so that the user plane functional network element forwards the received service data message according to the data message forwarding policy;
    其中,所述数据报文转发策略包括:Wherein, the data packet forwarding strategy includes:
    判断在至少一个包检测规则中是否存在与所述业务数据报文匹配的包检测规则,若是,则根据所述包检测规则转发所述业务数据报文,否则,判断所述业务数据报文包含的目的地址和源地址是否属于同一虚拟网络组;Judging whether there is a packet detection rule matching the service data packet in at least one packet detection rule, and if so, forwarding the service data packet according to the packet detection rule, otherwise, judging that the service data packet contains Whether the destination address and source address belong to the same virtual network group;
    若确定所述目的地址和源地址属于同一虚拟网络组,则不转发所述业务数据报文,若确定所述目的地址和源地址不属于同一虚拟网络组,则根据设定包检测规则转发所述业务数据报文;If it is determined that the destination address and the source address belong to the same virtual network group, the service data packet is not forwarded. If it is determined that the destination address and the source address do not belong to the same virtual network group, the packet is forwarded according to the set packet detection rules. Describe the business data message;
    其中,所述包检测规则用于指示对业务数据报文采用的转发方式。Wherein, the packet detection rule is used to indicate the forwarding mode adopted for the service data message.
  12. 一种通信方法,应用于策略控制功能网元,其特征在于,包括:A communication method, applied to a policy control function network element, is characterized in that, comprising:
    接收应用功能网元或能力开放功能网元或统一数据仓库网元下发的虚拟网络组配置信息,其中,所述虚拟网络组配置信息包含至少一个虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,所述至少一个虚拟网络组为网络侧针对终端设备发起的目标业务配置,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;Receive virtual network group configuration information issued by an application function network element, a capability openness function network element, or a unified data warehouse network element, where the virtual network group configuration information includes configuration information corresponding to at least one virtual network group, and the at least one virtual network group A virtual network group is the target service configuration initiated by the network side for the terminal device, each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, and the terminal equipment managed by any virtual network group The device can form a virtual local area network;
    根据所述虚拟网络组配置信息,生成至少一个用户路由选择策略,并将所述至少一个用户路由选择策略下发至所述终端设备。Generate at least one user routing policy according to the virtual network group configuration information, and deliver the at least one user routing policy to the terminal device.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述用户路由选择策略包含业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的组标识,所述业务信息为所述目标业务的业务信息。The method according to claim 12, wherein the user routing policy includes service information and a group identifier of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information, and the service information is the service of the target service information.
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述配置信息至少包含所述业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的可服务区域信息;The method according to claim 13, wherein the configuration information includes at least the service information and serviceable area information of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information;
    所述用户路由选择策略还包含与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的可服务区域信息;The user routing policy further includes serviceable area information of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information;
    其中,所述可服务区域信息用于指示虚拟网络组可服务的地理区域范围。Wherein, the serviceable area information is used to indicate the geographic area range that the virtual network group can serve.
  15. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理单元;A communication device, comprising a processing unit;
    所述处理单元用于在发起目标业务时,根据所述目标业务的业务信息,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组;其中,所述至少一个虚拟网络组为网络侧针对所述目标业务配置,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;The processing unit is configured to select a target virtual network group from at least one virtual network group according to the service information of the target service when initiating a target service; wherein, the at least one virtual network group is a network side for the target Service configuration, each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage terminal devices accessing the virtual network group, and the terminal devices managed by any virtual network group can form a virtual local area network;
    所述处理单元还用于确定所述目标业务在所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话,并通过所述目标会话进行数据传输。The processing unit is further configured to determine a target session of the target service in the target virtual network group, and perform data transmission through the target session.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元根据所述目标业务的业务信息,在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组时,具体用于:The communication device according to claim 15, wherein when the processing unit selects a target virtual network group from at least one virtual network group according to the service information of the target service, the processing unit is specifically configured to:
    在至少一个用户路由选择策略中,选择与所述业务信息匹配的目标用户路由选择策略,其中,所述目标用户路由选择策略包含所述业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个可用虚拟网络组的组标识;In at least one user routing policy, a target user routing policy matching the service information is selected, wherein the target user routing policy includes the service information and at least one available virtual network corresponding to the service information the group ID of the group;
    在所述至少一个虚拟网络组中,选择包含在所述至少一个可用虚拟网络组中的所述目标虚拟网络组。In the at least one virtual network group, the target virtual network group included in the at least one available virtual network group is selected.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元确定所述目标业务在所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话时,具体用于:The communication device according to claim 16, wherein when the processing unit determines the target session of the target service in the target virtual network group, the processing unit is specifically configured to:
    在已建立的会话中,选择与所述目标用户路由选择策略匹配的所述目标会话;或者In an established session, select the target session that matches the target user routing policy; or
    向会话管理功能网元发送会话创建请求,所述会话创建请求用于请求创建所述目标会话,其中,所述会话创建请求携带所述目标虚拟网络组的组标识。A session creation request is sent to the session management function network element, where the session creation request is used to request the creation of the target session, wherein the session creation request carries the group identifier of the target virtual network group.
  18. 根据权利要求15~17任一所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置还包括收发单元,所述处理单元在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组之前,所述收发单元还用于:The communication device according to any one of claims 15 to 17, wherein the communication device further comprises a transceiver unit, and before the processing unit selects a target virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group, the transceiver unit further comprises Used for:
    在所述终端设备注册入网的流程中,接收接入与移动性管理功能网元下发的可服务虚拟网络组列表;或者In the process of registering the terminal device into the network, receiving the serviceable virtual network group list issued by the access and mobility management function network element; or
    在所述终端设备配置更新的流程中,接收所述接入与移动性管理功能网元下发的可服务虚拟网络组列表;In the process of updating the configuration of the terminal device, receiving a serviceable virtual network group list issued by the access and mobility management function network element;
    其中,所述可服务虚拟网络组列表包含所述目标虚拟网络组。Wherein, the serviceable virtual network group list includes the target virtual network group.
  19. 根据权利要求16~18任一所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元在至少一个虚拟网络组中选择目标虚拟网络组之前,所述收发单元还用于:The communication device according to any one of claims 16 to 18, wherein before the processing unit selects a target virtual network group in at least one virtual network group, the transceiver unit is further configured to:
    接收策略控制功能网元下发的所述至少一个用户路由选择策略。The at least one user routing policy issued by the policy control function network element is received.
  20. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理单元;A communication device, comprising a processing unit;
    所述处理单元用于根据来自终端设备的会话创建请求,确定目标虚拟网络组,其中, 所述会话创建请求为所述终端设备在发起目标业务时发送的请求,所述目标虚拟网络组包含在网络侧针对所述目标业务配置的至少一个虚拟网络组中,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;The processing unit is configured to determine a target virtual network group according to a session creation request from a terminal device, wherein the session creation request is a request sent by the terminal device when initiating a target service, and the target virtual network group is included in the In at least one virtual network group configured on the network side for the target service, each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, and the terminals managed by any virtual network group The device can form a virtual local area network;
    所述处理单元还用于建立所述目标虚拟网络组中的目标会话,所述目标会话用于所述终端设备进行数据传输。The processing unit is further configured to establish a target session in the target virtual network group, where the target session is used for data transmission by the terminal device.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述通信装置还包括收发单元,所述处理单元在确定目标虚拟网络组之前,所述收发单元还用于:The communication device according to claim 20, wherein the communication device further comprises a transceiver unit, and before the processing unit determines the target virtual network group, the transceiver unit is further configured to:
    接收来自统一数据管理功能网元的虚拟网络组配置信息;所述虚拟网络组配置信息包含至少一个虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,所述至少一个虚拟网络组包含所述目标虚拟网络组,所述配置信息包含如下至少一项:Receive virtual network group configuration information from a unified data management function network element; the virtual network group configuration information includes configuration information corresponding to at least one virtual network group, the at least one virtual network group includes the target virtual network group, and the The configuration information includes at least one of the following:
    默认组指示信息;可服务区域信息;地址信息;Default group indication information; serviceable area information; address information;
    其中,所述默认组指示信息用于指示虚拟网络组是否为设定的默认虚拟网络组;所述可服务区域信息用于指示虚拟网络组可服务的地理区域范围;所述地址信息用于指示虚拟网络组包含的至少一个待分配给终端设备的地址。Wherein, the default group indication information is used to indicate whether the virtual network group is a set default virtual network group; the serviceable area information is used to indicate the range of geographical areas that the virtual network group can serve; the address information is used to indicate The virtual network group contains at least one address to be assigned to the terminal device.
  22. 根据权利要求20或21所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述会话创建请求携带虚拟网络组的组标识,所述处理单元确定目标虚拟网络组时,具体用于:The communication device according to claim 20 or 21, wherein the session creation request carries a group identifier of the virtual network group, and when the processing unit determines the target virtual network group, it is specifically used for:
    确定所述组标识所对应的虚拟网络组为所述目标虚拟网络组。It is determined that the virtual network group corresponding to the group identifier is the target virtual network group.
  23. 根据权利要求21或22所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元根据来自终端设备的会话创建请求,确定目标虚拟网络组时,具体用于:The communication device according to claim 21 or 22, wherein when the processing unit determines the target virtual network group according to the session creation request from the terminal device, it is specifically used for:
    若所述会话创建请求未携带虚拟网络组的组标识,则根据所述虚拟网络组配置信息,将设定的默认虚拟网络组确定为所述目标虚拟网络组。If the session creation request does not carry the group identifier of the virtual network group, the set default virtual network group is determined as the target virtual network group according to the virtual network group configuration information.
  24. 根据权利要求21~23任一所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述处理单元与所述收发单元协作,还用于:The communication device according to any one of claims 21 to 23, wherein the processing unit cooperates with the transceiver unit, and is further configured to:
    根据所述目标虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,为所述终端设备分配地址;或者Allocate an address to the terminal device according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group; or
    将所述目标虚拟网络组的组标识发送到AAA服务器,以使所述AAA服务器根据所述组标识,确定所述目标虚拟网络组,及根据所述目标虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,为所述终端设备分配地址;Send the group identifier of the target virtual network group to the AAA server, so that the AAA server determines the target virtual network group according to the group identifier, and according to the configuration information corresponding to the target virtual network group, is assigning addresses to the terminal equipment;
    其中,所述配置信息包含所述地址信息。Wherein, the configuration information includes the address information.
  25. 根据权利要求20~24任一所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述收发单元还用于:The communication device according to any one of claims 20 to 24, wherein the transceiver unit is further configured to:
    向用户面功能网元下发数据报文转发策略,以使所述用户面功能网元根据所述数据报文转发策略,对接收到的业务数据报文进行转发;delivering a data message forwarding policy to the user plane functional network element, so that the user plane functional network element forwards the received service data message according to the data message forwarding policy;
    其中,所述数据报文转发策略包括:Wherein, the data packet forwarding strategy includes:
    判断在至少一个包检测规则中是否存在与所述业务数据报文匹配的包检测规则,若是,则根据所述包检测规则转发所述业务数据报文,否则,判断所述业务数据报文包含的目的地址和源地址是否属于同一虚拟网络组;Judging whether there is a packet detection rule matching the service data packet in at least one packet detection rule, and if so, forwarding the service data packet according to the packet detection rule, otherwise, judging that the service data packet contains Whether the destination address and source address belong to the same virtual network group;
    若确定所述目的地址和源地址属于同一虚拟网络组,则不转发所述业务数据报文,若确定所述目的地址和源地址不属于同一虚拟网络组,则根据设定包检测规则转发所述业务数据报文;If it is determined that the destination address and the source address belong to the same virtual network group, the service data packet is not forwarded. If it is determined that the destination address and the source address do not belong to the same virtual network group, the packet is forwarded according to the set packet detection rules. Describe the business data message;
    其中,所述包检测规则用于指示对业务数据报文采用的转发方式。Wherein, the packet detection rule is used to indicate the forwarding mode adopted for the service data message.
  26. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括收发单元和处理单元;A communication device, comprising a transceiver unit and a processing unit;
    所述收发单元用于接收应用功能网元或能力开放功能网元或统一数据仓库网元下发的虚拟网络组配置信息,其中,所述虚拟网络组配置信息包含至少一个虚拟网络组所对应的配置信息,所述至少一个虚拟网络组为网络侧针对终端设备发起的目标业务配置,所述至少一个虚拟网络组中每个虚拟网络组用于管理接入该虚拟网络组的终端设备,任一个虚拟网络组管理的终端设备能够组成一个虚拟局域网;The transceiver unit is configured to receive the virtual network group configuration information issued by the application function network element, the capability opening function network element or the unified data warehouse network element, wherein the virtual network group configuration information includes at least one virtual network group corresponding. Configuration information, the at least one virtual network group is the target service configuration initiated by the network side for the terminal device, and each virtual network group in the at least one virtual network group is used to manage the terminal equipment accessing the virtual network group, any one The terminal devices managed by the virtual network group can form a virtual local area network;
    所述处理单元与所述收发单元协作,用于根据所述虚拟网络组配置信息,生成至少一个用户路由选择策略,并将所述至少一个用户路由选择策略下发至所述终端设备。The processing unit cooperates with the transceiver unit, and is configured to generate at least one user routing policy according to the virtual network group configuration information, and deliver the at least one user routing policy to the terminal device.
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述用户路由选择策略包含业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的组标识,所述业务信息为所述目标业务的业务信息。The communication device according to claim 26, wherein the user routing policy includes service information and a group identifier of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information, and the service information is the target service business information.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的通信装置,其特征在于,所述配置信息至少包含所述业务信息及与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的可服务区域信息;The communication device according to claim 27, wherein the configuration information includes at least the service information and serviceable area information of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information;
    所述用户路由选择策略还包含与所述业务信息对应的至少一个虚拟网络组的可服务区域信息;The user routing policy further includes serviceable area information of at least one virtual network group corresponding to the service information;
    其中,所述可服务区域信息用于指示虚拟网络组可服务的地理区域范围。Wherein, the serviceable area information is used to indicate the geographic area range that the virtual network group can serve.
  29. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:A communication device, comprising:
    至少一个处理器;以及与所述至少一个处理器通信连接的存储器、通信接口;at least one processor; and a memory, a communication interface communicatively coupled to the at least one processor;
    其中,所述通信接口用于接收来自所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置的信号并传输至所述处理器或将来自所述处理器的信号发送给所述通信装置之外的其它通信装置;Wherein, the communication interface is used to receive signals from other communication devices other than the communication device and transmit to the processor or send signals from the processor to other communication devices other than the communication device ;
    所述存储器存储有可被所述至少一个处理器执行的指令,所述至少一个处理器通过执行所述存储器存储的指令,使得所述通信装置实现如权利要求1~5中任一项所述的方法,或实现如权利要求6~11中任一项所述的方法,或实现如权利要求12~14中任一项所述的方法。The memory stores instructions executable by the at least one processor, and by executing the instructions stored in the memory, the at least one processor causes the communication device to implement any one of claims 1 to 5 , or implement the method as claimed in any one of claims 6 to 11 , or implement the method as claimed in any one of claims 12 to 14 .
  30. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机可读程序,当所述计算机可读程序在通信装置上运行时,使得所述通信装置执行如权利要求1~5中任一项所述的方法,或执行如权利要求6~11中任一项所述的方法,或执行如权利要求12~14中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer-readable program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer-readable program is executed on a communication device, the communication device is made to execute the method as claimed in the claims. The method of any one of 1 to 5, or the execution of the method of any one of claims 6 to 11, or the execution of the method of any one of claims 12 to 14.
  31. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或指令,当通信装置读取并执行所述计算机程序产品时,使得通信装置执行如权利要求1~5中任一项所述的方法,或执行如权利要求6~11中任一项所述的方法,或执行如权利要求12~14中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that, the computer program product comprises a computer program or instructions, when a communication device reads and executes the computer program product, the communication device is made to perform the method described in any one of claims 1 to 5. The method described in the above, or the method according to any one of claims 6 to 11 is performed, or the method according to any one of claims 12 to 14 is performed.
PCT/CN2022/071996 2021-01-18 2022-01-14 Communication method and communication apparatus WO2022152238A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202110062216.0 2021-01-18
CN202110062216.0A CN114828165A (en) 2021-01-18 2021-01-18 Communication method and communication device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022152238A1 true WO2022152238A1 (en) 2022-07-21

Family

ID=82447961

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/071996 WO2022152238A1 (en) 2021-01-18 2022-01-14 Communication method and communication apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN114828165A (en)
WO (1) WO2022152238A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115242654A (en) * 2022-08-08 2022-10-25 北京城建智控科技股份有限公司 Automatic networking method and system for rail transit all-in-one machine
CN115776678A (en) * 2022-11-14 2023-03-10 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 Networking method, server and medium based on 5G local area network
CN116886495A (en) * 2023-07-10 2023-10-13 武汉船舶通信研究所(中国船舶集团有限公司第七二二研究所) 5G private network enabling platform
WO2024032290A1 (en) * 2022-08-09 2024-02-15 中国电信股份有限公司 Session establishment method and apparatus, and network device and storage medium

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114978910B (en) * 2022-08-02 2022-10-25 广东省新一代通信与网络创新研究院 Time sensitivity realization method and system of virtualization core network
CN117793943A (en) * 2022-09-20 2024-03-29 维沃移动通信有限公司 Network route configuration method and device, network side equipment and terminal
CN115550288B (en) * 2022-11-29 2023-02-28 广东省新一代通信与网络创新研究院 Method and system for forwarding Ethernet data stream

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110247779A (en) * 2019-06-17 2019-09-17 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Method of multicasting, device, equipment and the system of the multicast group of virtual network group
CN111901242A (en) * 2019-05-06 2020-11-06 华为技术有限公司 Routing rule management method and communication device
CN111917563A (en) * 2019-05-07 2020-11-10 华为技术有限公司 Routing rule configuration method and communication device
WO2020233532A1 (en) * 2019-05-17 2020-11-26 华为技术有限公司 Virtual network communication method, device and system

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111901242A (en) * 2019-05-06 2020-11-06 华为技术有限公司 Routing rule management method and communication device
CN111917563A (en) * 2019-05-07 2020-11-10 华为技术有限公司 Routing rule configuration method and communication device
WO2020233532A1 (en) * 2019-05-17 2020-11-26 华为技术有限公司 Virtual network communication method, device and system
CN110247779A (en) * 2019-06-17 2019-09-17 腾讯科技(深圳)有限公司 Method of multicasting, device, equipment and the system of the multicast group of virtual network group

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HUAWEI, HISILICON: "Procedures for support of 5G VN group communication", 3GPP DRAFT; S2-1911585, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. SA WG2, no. Reno, NV, USA; 20191118 - 20191122, 8 November 2019 (2019-11-08), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051821666 *

Cited By (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN115242654A (en) * 2022-08-08 2022-10-25 北京城建智控科技股份有限公司 Automatic networking method and system for rail transit all-in-one machine
WO2024032290A1 (en) * 2022-08-09 2024-02-15 中国电信股份有限公司 Session establishment method and apparatus, and network device and storage medium
CN115776678A (en) * 2022-11-14 2023-03-10 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 Networking method, server and medium based on 5G local area network
CN115776678B (en) * 2022-11-14 2024-04-02 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 Networking method, server and medium based on 5G local area network
CN116886495A (en) * 2023-07-10 2023-10-13 武汉船舶通信研究所(中国船舶集团有限公司第七二二研究所) 5G private network enabling platform
CN116886495B (en) * 2023-07-10 2024-04-09 武汉船舶通信研究所(中国船舶集团有限公司第七二二研究所) 5G private network enabling platform

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114828165A (en) 2022-07-29

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022152238A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
US20220174119A1 (en) Session establishment method and device
US11690110B2 (en) Time sensitive network bridge configuration
CN113785634B (en) Wireless device paging over wireless networks
CN111771394B (en) System and method for UE context and PDU session context management
US20230093339A1 (en) Session Management Method, Apparatus, and System
CN111200845B (en) Resource information sending method, device and system
US11172405B2 (en) Method for checking change in wireless connection type of terminal in third-party application server
WO2021031562A1 (en) Information obtaining method and device
EP4024956A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus, and system
WO2011060673A1 (en) Public bearer establishment method, data transmission method and core network side apparatus
EP3445072B1 (en) Mobile radio communication network and method for associating a mobile radio terminal device to a network slice instance of a mobile radio communication network
CN113708947A (en) Slice access method, device and system
CN111770486B (en) Terminal roaming method and device
WO2022021971A1 (en) Communication method, first policy control network element, and communication system
WO2022052875A1 (en) Terminal cross-region communication method, network element device, and storage medium
US20220264690A1 (en) Method for influencing data traffic routing in a core network
WO2021115429A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
KR101481337B1 (en) Mobile Communication System Based on Software Defined Networks and Method for Processing Access of Mobile Equipment thereof
CN115734173A (en) Method and apparatus for inter-device communication
WO2023082858A1 (en) Method for determining mobility management policy, communication apparatus, and communication system
WO2023143212A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2023197737A1 (en) Message sending method, pin management method, communication apparatus, and communication system
WO2023077948A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2024051313A1 (en) Communication resource management method, apparatus and system, and storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22739114

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 22739114

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1